You are on page 1of 415

..

(I) (")
~ 0 CD
m ~ 3: 0 ::::s
:::I
3 -3: :s c.
..,_.
--.
ca
en
::r
i:
N,
III
-~
N
Z
!:l
PA 615 Separation System
-::s-o
:::I ~----~---
C

-
III

f!!Lt,....us;'.f ".... ,iiIi - k RA-- be


~ 1
Safety

PA615 . System Description


Separation
2
System

Operating Instructions
3

Parameter List
4

Alarms and Fault Finding
5

Installation System
Reference 6

• Marine & Diesel Equipment


Service Manual
7

Spare Parts Catalogue


Printed .lul 2006
8
System Manual No. 577229.02
Document No. 577230-02
Product No. 576845-01

Published By:

AlIa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telelax: +46 8 530 31040

@ Alfa Laval Tumba AB 19 July 2006

This publication or any part there 01 may not be reproduced or


transmitted by any process or means without prior written
permission 01 AlIa Lava! Tumba AB.
PA Purifier System

Safety
Printed Oct 2005
Book No. 1810894-02 V 3

Alia Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions lor improvement 01 this publication would be

gratelully appreciated.
Copies 01 this pUblication can be ordered Irom your local
Alia Laval company.

Published by: Alia Laval Tumba AB


Marine & Diesel Equipment
SE - 14780 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alia Laval Tumba AB 2005.
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Safety Instructions

Important - read this!

The centrifugal separator includes parts


that rotate at very high speeds, generating
huge forces. It is therefore essential for the
safe operation of this separator system that
you read and understand this manual,
including the warning signs and safety
precautions presented in this manual.
Failure to do so may cause a fatal accident.

• 1.1 Key Factors for Safe


Operation
The purifier system is designed and supplied for
a specific function (type ofliquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density, etc.). The system
must be used for this function only, and strictly
within Alfa Laval's specifications.
-
Incorrect operation or maintenance may result
in a heavy unbalance, reduction of material
strength, etc. that could lead to serious
breakdown with fatal injury or damage to


property.
For safe operation, strictly follow the
instructions for installation, operation and
maintenance in this manual.

1810894-02 1
1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY

The following is compulsory for safe


operation:
1 Never start up a separator before the bowl is
completely assembled, and all fastenings
securely tightened.
2 Never discharge a vibrating separator. Always
stop with the emergency stop button.
3 Never begin to disassemble a separator
before it has come to a complete standstill.
4 Always set the discharge intervals according
to instructions in the instruction book.
S Never ignore alarms. Always eliminate the
cause before resuming operation.
6

7
Never use the separator for other liquids than
those specified by Alfa Laval.
Never operate a separator with a different
power supply frequency than stated on the

machine plate.
8 Ensure that enough conditioning water is
added before discharge, as described in the
instruction book.
9 Clean the operating system regularly to avoid
sludge discharge malfunction.
10 Ensure that personnel are fully trained and
competent in installation, operation,
maintenance, and emergency procedures.


11 Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts and
the special tools supplied.

2 1810894-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.2 Warning Sign Definitions


Below are definitions ofthe warning signs used.
Danger - serious injury or death Example:
This type of safety sign or instruction
indicates an imminently hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury. - Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.

• Warning - serious injury or death


This type of safety sign or instruction indicates
a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Example:

Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is in agreement
with the machine plate. " incorrect, reSUlting
overspeed may cause breakdown.

Caution - minor or moderate injury Example:

~~ir~:~S~~~:i~::;V~~~~~:~~~di~::~~t~~ ~~pj,~ti


'CAUTION' used without the safety alert Bum hazard
symbol indicates a potentially hazardous Various machine surfaces can be hot and cause
situation which, if not avoided, could result in burns.
equipment damage.

1810894-02 3
1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY

1.3 Summary of Safety Hazards


Below follows a selection ofthe warnings which
have been used in the text ofthis instruction
manual to ensure safe installation, start-up,
operation, stop, and maintenance. Further
warnings are to be found in the appropriate
places throughout the manual.

Installation

V1N'Aft",ti G

- Crush hazards
Use only the two special lifting eyes (M12) for lifting
the machine. They are to be screwed into the
special threaded holes.
Other holes are not dimensioned for lifting the
machine.
A failing separator can cause accidents reSUlting In

serious Injury and damage.

Start-up
Be especially observant during start-up. If
there is any abnormal vibration, immediately
stop the separator and investigate the cause.
Clean the bowl if it contains sediment.

Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be In place and

properly tightened. Non-compllance may lead to
breakdown.

Continued on next page

4 1810894-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation
and earthing (grounding).

Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency Is in agreement
with the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting
overspeed may cause breakdown.

Breakdown hazard
Use the separation system for the purpose, and
within the limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to
do so could cause a violent breakdown.

• Breakdown hazard
Always observe the separator during start-up after
assembly. If strong vibration occurs, stop by using
the Emergency Stop bullon and evacuate the room.

If power cable polarity has been reversed, the


separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating
parts can loosen.

1810894-02 5
1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY

Operation

Breakdown hazard
If strong vibration occurs, press the emergency
stop button and evacuate the room.
Never discharge a vibrating separator. Vibration
may then become violent and result in breakdown.

Noise hazard
Use ear protection if noise levels are high.

Breakdown hazard
Never reset an alarm without first finding and
remedying the cause.

Bum hazard
Avoid contact with hot surfaces. Process pipes,
various machine surfaces, and processed liquid can
be hot and cause burns.

Slip hazard
Check all connections for leakage.
Oil leakage may make the floor slippery.

6 1810894-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Stop

Breakdown hazard
Stop the separator by means of the control unit, and
not by turning off the motor.

Never atlemptto clean the bowl by manual discharge


in connection with stop.

Emergency stop

Disintegration hazard
If unusually strong vibration occurs, press the
Emergency Stop bullon and leave the room
Do not enter the room after an emergency stop
while the separator is still rotating.


Disintegration hazard
Do not start the separator after an emergency stop
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
Make sure that the bowl is clean before restart.

1810894-02 7
1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY

Maintenance

Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work. The rotation indicator lamp, where applicable,
must be off.

Disintegration hazards


Inspect regularly for erosion damage. Inspect
frequently if the process liquid is erosive.

Disintegration hazard
Pits and spots foiming a line may indicate cracks
beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and are
totally unacceptable.
Replace the part if corrosion can be suspected of
affecting its strength or function.

Disintegration hazard
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability of
components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.

Disintegration hazard


The assembly mark on the bowl hood must never
pass the mark on the bowl body by more than 25°.

8 1810894-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SAFETY 1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

o I

~
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that the separator has come to a
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work.

Disintegration hazard
Separator parts that are either missing, worn
beyond their safe limits, or Incorrectly assembled,
may cause severe damage or fatal injury•

• Disintegration hazard
Do not weld nor heat parts that are subject to high-
speed rotation.

Cut hazards
The discs have sharp edges that can cause cuts.

• Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before restart.
All couplings, covers, and guards must be in place
and properly tightened. Non compliance may lead
to breakdown.

1810894-02 9
PA Purifier System

System Description
Printed Oct 2005
Book No. 1810895-02 V 4

Published By:
AlIa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden

Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telelax: +46 8 530 310 40

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 26 October 2005

This publication or any part there 01 may not be reproduced or


transmitted by any process or means without prior written
permission 01 AlIa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents

1 System Overview 5
1.1 The Oil Flow 5
1.2 System Layout 6
1.3 System Components,
PA 600/610 8
1.4 System Components,
PA 605/615 9
1.5 System Components,
PA 625/635 10

2 The Process 11
2.1 Purifying 11

• 2.2 Definition of Terms 12

1810895-02
1 System Overview

The PA Purifier System is designed for cleaning The system comprises:


oflubricating and fuel oils in marine and power
• A separator.
applications and can handle the following types
of oil: • Ancillary equipment including a control unit.

• distillate • Optional equipment such as oil feed pump,


oil heating system, sludge removal kit, etc.
• marine diesel oil
The separating systems can be operated as
• intermediate fuel oil
single, parallel or serial systems.
• heavy fuel oil with a maximum viscosity of
During the process, the cleaned oil leaves the
600 eSt
separator through the oil outlet, separated
• detergent lubricating oil water leaves through the water outlet, and

• • R&O lubricating oil


In the purifier process, heated oil is fed through
the separator to clean the oil from solid
particles and water.
sludge accumulates at the periphery of the
separator bowl.
The control unit initiates a sludge discharge at
preset intervals. .-;~

Sludge and water are then discharged through


sludge ports at the periphery of the bowl and
collected in a sludge tank.

1.1 The Oil Flow Settling tank Change-over Backpressure


valve regulating
The unprocessed oil is fed by a positive valve

displacement pump, operating at a constant flow.


Depending on the oil type, the oil may need to be
heated.

• After the heater the change over valve directs


the oil to the separator. The separated oil passes
the manually operated back-pressure regulating
valve to the receiving tank.
The oil can also be directed back to the tank,
bypassing the separator. This is the case when
the oil temperature is outside the preset range,
Pump Heater Separator Daily
during separator start and stop procedures, and
service tank
during alarm conditions.

1810895-02 5
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2 System Layout

Heater Temperature Pressure transmitter, Pneumatically controlled Separator


transmitter (TT1, 011 (PT1) change-over valve (V1)
Heats unprocessed Cleans the oil by
oil to separation TT2) removing water
Measures the pressure Directs the unprocessed oil to
temperature. Measures the oil in the oil inlet, and the separator, or back to the and solid
temperature and signals the control unit. settling tank (recirculation- particles.
signals the control fuel oil only).
unit.

Feed pump
Feeds
unprocessed oil to the
separator.
The position of PT
depends on separator
size and design.
PT r--+---,

Unprocessed oil
inlet

Oil return
Displacement water

Opening water
Water inlet
Closing water


Solenoid valve block, water Sludge outlet

Distributes separator opening!


- - - Additional equipment closing water, and conditioning water.
not part of the PA

6 1810895-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Control unit Pressure transmitter, oil Regulating valve (RV4)


(PT4) Regulates the back-
Supervises the separation
system. Measures the pressure in pressure in the clean oil
the oil outlet, and signals the outlet.
control unit.

• ........

,
••
• .............
~

- - - - - - - - - - i PT }----~;;:J_--.... Clean oil outlet


to service tank

1810895-02 7
1 SYSTEM OVERVI EW PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.3 System Components, PA 600/610

Control unit
EPC 50 Regulating
valve

I
Clean oil outlet ~
... " " I... J
...........
."
. <tI"" "
,Operating
Temperature


.......... water
transmitter
, ......
, I"
....... " ~ ...
Pressure
I ' , transmitter (oil
,I I
inlet)
Oil Inlet

Oil reclrculatlon
Change-over
valve

011 In
Pressure
transmitter (oil
outlet)
Oil out

Sludge
and water


outlet

8 1610695·02
~',-"",""..,~-,.7_;

PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.4 System Components, PA 605/615

Control unit
EPC 50

,,. 11

,. ,.'"'"""
i""..."':"


Operating water
", "'", .
,.....'"'""''''
I ""
Regulating
I I I valve
11 I
Oil in 1'1 Pressure
I ~ I transmitters
Oil out I
I' I
I I I

"1

Temperature
sensor


Clean oil outlet

\,\... ~I.&f ~

'w ~
Oil inlet

Oil recirculation

1610695-02 9
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.5 System Components, PA 625/635

Control unit
EPC 50


Operating water

Pressure Regulating
Oil in transmitters valve

Oil out

Pneumatic
3-way valve

Temperature
sensor

~ Oilintet

~ Oil recircutalion

10 1810895·02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2 THE PROCESS

2 The Process
The terms used in this process description are
explained in section "2.2 Definition of Terms" on
page 12.

2.1 Purifying
A water seal is added to the separator bowl
through the water inlet.
The separator is equipped with a gravity disc,
chosen according to factors such as oil
temperature, density, and feed rate. This choice

• decides the position ofthe interface between oil


and water seal.
The separator does not use a paring disc to pump
out the separated water. Instead, the water
leaves the bowl via the gravity disc, and leaves
the separator through the water/sludge outlet.

Process Cycle
1 A specific amount of water is added to the
separator bowl to form a water seal.
2 The feeding of unprocessed oil to the centre
of the separator bowl starts.
3 During the separation process sludge and

• water accumulate at the periphery of the


separator bowl. Cleaned oil is fed from the
separator by the integrated paring disc.
Excessive water leaves the bowl through the
water/sludge outlet to the sludge tank.
4 After the preset time between discharge
sequences, the oil feeding stops.
5 Displacement water is added to the bowl. The
displacement water reduces the oil loss at the
following sludge discharge.
6 A sludge discharge is initiated while the
displacement water is still flowing.
The next process cycle starts with adding of
water for a new water seal.

1810895-02 11
2 THE PROCESS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2.2 Definition of Terms


Preset time between sludge discharge When this time has elapsed after a sludge
sequences discharge, the next discharge is initiated.
(Parameter value)
Water seal Water, added to the separator bowl to prevent oil
(Parameter value) from escaping at the water outlet.
Displacement water Water, added to the separator bowl to displace
the oil and ensure there is reduced loss of oil at
sludge discharge.
Purifier A separator that cleans the oil from water and
sludge with continuous evacuating of separated
water.

12 1810895-02
PA Purifier System

Operating Instructions
Printed ",un 2008
Book No. 1810896-02 V 6

Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be

gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE - 14780 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2008.
Contents

1 Operating 3
1 .1 Before Star1up 3
1.2 Operator Panel 6
1.3 Star1up 7
1.4 During operation 10
1.5 Stop 13
1.6 Emergency Stop 15
1.7 After Emergency Stop 15
1.8 Intervals Between
Sludge Discharges
(Valid for P 625/635 only) 17


1.8.1 Background .. 17
1.8.2 Recommended intervals between
sludge discharges 17
1.8.3 Fuel oil cleaning 18
1.8.4 Lubricating oil cleaning 18
1.8.5 Bowl inspection 20

1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

1 Operating
1.1 Before Startup
The correct gravity disc must be installed in the
separator. See chapter 4.3.3 Selection ofgravity
disc in the Separator Manual.

1 Check that the separator is correctly


assembled and connected to power supply of
correct voltage and frequency.

• Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and
properly tightened. Non compliance may lead to
breakdown.

Electrical hazard
Follow local regulations for electrical installation and
earthing (grounding).

• Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency is In agreement with
the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed
50 Hz?
60 Hz?

may cause breakdown.

Use the separation system for the purpose, and


within the limits, specified by Alia Laval. Failure to do
so could cause a violent breakdown.

1810896-02 3
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

2 Check the oil sump level and top up if


necessary.

• For P 600, P 605, P 610, and P 615:


The oil level should be slightly above middle
of the sight glass.

[MO'f£]
Too much or too 11t1le oil can damage the separator
bearings.

• For P 625/P 635:



Remove the oil pin and make sure that the oil
level is above the lower end of the pin.

4 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

Rotation Direction

Check the rotation of the bowl by doing a quick


starVstop. The motor fan must rotate in a clockwise
direction.

If power cable polarity has been reversed, the


separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating
parts can loosen.

Air Valve Block (PA 600, 6101


Use the pressure gauge situated in the air valve
block to check that the air supply is correct.
See the Installation System Reference booklet.
i)10
_ "";=T

t e'sV

I I

1810896-02 5
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1.2 Operator Panel

General principle
The 'Enter' button is used to:
- enter into a parameter list
- enter into a parameter
- accepVstore a new parameter value.
The '+' or the '-' buttons are used to change the
value flashing in the display window.

Process parameters
Set the process parameters to suit the ~ OP
installation as follows:
1 Push 'Enter'. Parameter no. 1 in the process
parameter list is displayed.
You have now come to the process parameter

list. Go through the list and set parameters.
2 When the parameters have been set, 'End I/O'
(flashing) shows. Push' +'. 'Standst.' is now
displayed.

6 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

1.3 Startup
Before startup make sure that all the main
supply valves for air, oil, and water are open.
Open heating media supply valve if applicable.
Switch on the power supplies. Make sure the
control selection switch is in the manual
position.

1 Start the oil feed pump.

difdif CJ tm 0
o '1Q}
~

• 2 If necessary, vent air from the heater through


the relief valve (if applicable).
Switch on the heater. (if applicable).
~ OP

--
[i • •


3 Press the process start/stop button

--
[i.iiJ

1810896-02 7
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4 Start the separator.

iIiIiIiI
~~
0 / 'OI~

5 Listen and observe.


Vibration may occur during start up, when
passing critical speeds.This is normal and
should pass without danger.
If vibration increases, or continues at full


speed, press the emergency stop button and
stand clear until the vibration stops.
The cause of vibration must be determined
and corrected before starting again!
See the Alarms and Fault Finding booklet.

Breakdown hazard
Always observe the separator during start-up after
assembly. If strong vibration occurs, stop by using
the Emergency Stop button and evacuate the room.

If the system is equipped with a vibration sensor, and


has control of heater and feed pump, the Auto Start
can be used.

8 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

6 Ensure that the separator is at full speed (see


ammeter on starter). 'Start.' is shown on the
display.

7 Check the oil feed temperature by pressing


the' +' button twice.

8 Wait until the oil feed temperature is correct:


Heavy fuel mode 98 QC

• Lube oil mode 95 QC (trunk engines), or 90 QC


(cross-head engines)
Diesel oil mode 40 QC

9 When 'Standby' is shown on the display, and


the oil is at the correct temperature. press the
process start/stop button on the operator
panel to start the separation process.

1810896-02 9
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1.4 During operation

Operator panel information

Observe the operator panel infonnation:


• Heater operation LED lit (green)
• Separator system operation LED lit (green)
• Activated valve LED lit (green)

During nonnal operation, the time to next sludge


discharge is shown on the right hand side of the
display.
Any alarm is indicated on the display. For
further information see the Alarms and Fault
Finding booklet. •
[MOTE]
Regularly check connections. TIghten if necessary.

10 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

["oor£]
The values displayed in the examples below are not
recommendations.

More operational information may be read as


required, by pressing the '+' button repeatedly.
.......-
o
.L:'}~

To return to normal display, Le. the trigger


value, and time to next sludge discharge,


continue pressing the '+' button.

1 Oil feed temperature. For the correct


separation temperature see the Installation TT1 98 QC
System Reference booklet.

Oil pressure, oil inlet


PT1 1.4

Oil pressure, oil outlet


PT4 1.4

• 4 Accumulated operating time in hours


Run time 5 hours

1810896-02 11
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Noise hazard
Use ear protection If noise levels are high.

Breakdown hazard
Never reset an alarm without first finding and
remedying the cause.


Bum hazard
Avoid contact with hot surfaces. Process pipes,
various machine surfaces, and processed liquid
can be hot and cause burns.

Slip hazard
Check all connections for leakage.
011 leakage may make the floor slippery.


Bum hazard
To prevent hot water, 011 or steam from splashing,
make sure that the Inspection plug on the
discharge pipe Is In place.
Use safety goggles when removing the plug.

[NOTE]
Make sure that the hose clamps are fUlly tightened.

12 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

1.5 Stop

To stop the system:

1 Stop the system by pushing the process starV


stop button button on the operator panel.
A sludge discharge is initiated,
The yellow LED for separator stop sequence
starts to flash,
The stop sequence LED changes to steady
yellow, and the green LED for separation
system operation goes out, when the sludge
discharge is completed,

• 2 If an external heater is used, stop the heater


on the operator panel. ~ GP
o
Close the heating medium supply and outlet
valves (if applicable),

--
iJiJiI

• 3 Wait until the oil feed temperature starts to


drop, Read the temperature by pressing the
'+' button,

4 When the oil feed temperature has started to


drop, the feed pump will be stopped
automatically if controlled from the control unit
If the pump starter is independently
controlled, stop manually,

1610696-02 13
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

5 When the separator motor has stopped, apply


the brake, if any.

r
6 Wait until the separator has come to a
complete standstill (after about 20 minutes).

Breakdown hazard
Stop the separator by means of the control unit, and
not by tumln9 off the motor. •
Never attempt to clean the bowl by manual discharge
in connection with stop.

7 Release the brake, if any.

14 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

1.6 Emergency Stop

If an emergency situation occurs, press the


emergency stop button and evacuate the room.
Do not return until the separator has come to a
complete standstill.

Disintegration hazard
If unusually strong vibration occurs, press the
Emergency Stop button and evacuate the room
Do not enter the room after an emergency stop
while the separator is still rotating.

• 1.7 After Emergency Stop

Separator standstill

Dismantling work must not be started before all


rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill.

• Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work.

1810896-02 15
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Avoid accidental start

\IN';;''''~() .
-
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that separator has come 10 a complete
standstill before starting any dismantling work

See the Alarms and Fault Finding booklet for


emergency procedures.
Remedy the cause


The cause of the emergency must be remedied
before attempting to restart the separator.
Ifthe cause is not found, an overhaul must be
performed on the separator, and all moving parts
thoroughly checked
~

Separator reassembled

The separator must be fully reassembled with all


covers and guards in place and tightened before
unlocking the power supply and starting the

system.

Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before restart. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be In place and
properly tightened. Non compliance may lead to
breakdown.

16 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

1.8 Intervals Between


Sludge Discharges
(Valid for P 625/635
only)

1.8.1 Background

Disintegration hazard
Experience has shown that II intervals between
sludge discharges are too long, a compact and hard


sludge cake can accumUlate. On discharge, this cake
may break up and be discharged unevenly causing
Imbalance In the bowl. II Imbalance Is excessive,
there Is risk lor serious mechanical damage and
Injury to personnel.

Recommendations are given regarding initial


intervals between sludge discharges for different
applications. The setting may subsequently have
to be changed after actual inspection of the bowl.

1.8.2 Recommended intervals


between sludge discharges
Many factors influence accumulation and
hardening of sludge between the discharges, so
the appropriate interval depends on local


conditions. However, in order to have a
reasonable starting point the following table
shows recommended initial discharge intervals
and operating times to first inspection.

1810896-02 17
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1.8.3 Fuel oil cleaning


Type of fuel Recommendations
Inijial intervals between discharges Time to first bowl inspection
Cl
- Distillate (1.5 -6 cStl40
Marine Diesel Oil (max. 14cSV40 Cl
4 hours
2 hours
tweek
1 week
~Heavy Fuel Oil (Max in1elVal ) 1 hour ( 2 hours ) 2days

Conditions may change completely when


bunkers are changed. Therefore, great care must
be given to the discharge interval setting for
each new bunker. In case the actually used
discharge interval exceeds the recommended
initial value, the interval setting has to be
reduced, according to the table above, when a
new, unfamiliar bunker is separated. Use of
unstable fuel or mixing of incompatible fuel oils
may give precipitation of sludge and overloading
of the separator. •
1.8.4 Lubricating oil cleaning

Continuous operation:
In a new lubricating oil system the oil is initially
clean but as it gets dirtier the interval between
discharges will have to be shortened until a
"steady state" is reached. Following information
refers to systems in "steady state".


Type of fuel Recommended intervals for Crosshead and Trunk
Inijial intervals between Time to first bowl inspection
Main lUbricating oil system 1 - 2 hours 1 week

If separator has been out of operation:


If the separator has been out of service for 24
hours or longer, while the engine has been
running, the interval between discharges has to
be shortened. In this case the recommendation
is:
• Discharge interval 5 minutes until the whole oil
volume has passed twice through the
separator.

• After that resume normal discharge interval.

18 1810896-02
PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1 OPERATING

Intermittent operation:
For installations where one separator serves one
engine which is temporarily stopped the
following reco=endations apply: If the engine
is to be stopped for 24 hours or less:
• Keep the separator in operation for 8 hours
after the engine is stopped.
• Start the separator 8 hours before the engine
is started again.
Doing so most of the suspended particles and
water condensate will be removed from the
system and not settle in the sump tank. For
installations where one separator serves more
than one engine the following reco=endations

• apply:


Continuous use of the separator whenever
possible.
Frequent switches between the engine
systems to be cleaned. In a typical case with
one separator serving 2-4 auxiliary engines
switching after maximum 24 hours of cleaning.

Engine has not been in operation


since last cleaning of system oil
W. N ""ri1'li';~I~I1'$ejgI5~J'i!illiW
, ,it;:il)';. _ ;"'~~
• .4I;:.;WP ~ .lIi

1810896-02 19
1 OPERATING PA PURIFIER SYSTEM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1.8.5 Bowl inspection


To check ifthe initially selected interval is
appropriate, the bowl should be inspected after a
short test period shown in the previous tables.
If sludge space is clean:
Interval may be prolonged with steps of 15
minutes, but it must not exceed three times the
recommended initial interval.
"Sludge space is clean" means that no noticeable
amount of hard sludge remains in the sludge
space.
If sludge space is dirty:
Interval has to be shortened.
When the bowl is opened for routine cleaning,
the sludge space should always be inspected and
evaluated. If necessary, the interval between
discharges should then be changed accordingly.

[MarE]
Alia Laval assumes no responsibility lor the actual
choice 01 discharge intervals, as these entirely
depend on local conditions.

20 1810896-02
P-type Separation System

Parameter List
Printed Sep 2008
Book No. 1810897-02 V 4

Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be

gratefully appreciated.

Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local


Alfa Laval company.

Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB


Marine & Diesel Equipment
SE - 14780 Tumba
Sweden

© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2008.


Contents

1 Parameter Setting 3

2 Installation Parameters 7
3 Process Parameters 11

4 Factory Set Parameters 15

5 Sequence Diagram 18
5.1 Separation Sequence 20

1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 1 PARAMETER SETTING

1 Parameter Setting

The parameters are set in the operator


panel for the different separator systems,
and for different conditions within the
systems.

There are three parameter types: Installation,


Process, and Factory Set parameters.
The parameters are initially set at installation.
The process parameters can also be set as
required during operation.
• Parameters not in use are not displayed.
The parameter list in this booklet is valid for
PA and PU systems.

General principle
The 'ENTER' button is used to:
enter into a parameter list
- enter into a parameter
- accepVstore a new parameter value.
The '+' or the '-' buttons are used to change the
value flashing in the display window.

1610697-02 3
1 PARAMETER SETIING P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

To change parameters, proceed as follows: 4 Push the' +' or '-' button to change the
1 Push the 'ENTER' button. parameter value.

'Time to discharge P1 60' is shown. 'P1 is S Push the 'ENTER' button. The new value is
the parameter, and '60' is the set value. stored.

The '1' of the 'P1' is flashing. The parameter number is now flashing.

2 Push the '+' button until the number of the 6 Push the' +' or '-' button to go to the next
parameter you wish to program appears in parameter to be changed.
the display window. 7 To leave the list, push the' +' and the '-'
The chosen parameter number is now buttons at the same time. The display shows
flashing. 'Standst.' or, when in operation, the trigger
value to the left, and time remaining to
3 Push the 'ENTER' button. discharge on the right.
The chosen parameter number is now
shown on the left side in the display. The
parameter value is shown flashing on the
right side of the display.

LED for heater
(green)
Heater on/off
push-button

LED for control


program running
(green)

Control program
on/off push-button

Schematic
diagram with
position LEDs
LED for stop
sequence running
(yellow)

Sludge
discharge push-
button

Display window - push- + push- Enter Alarm reset LED for common LED showing
button button push- main alarm (red) this panel
button active

4 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 1 PARAMETER SETTING

The following lists are available for viewing


from a menu in the EPC-50 control unit:
• Install (parameters)
• Factory (parameters)

• Alarms
• Test
For detailed information see each list.
To open the menu and select a list, proceed as
follows:
1 Push the 'ENTER' button. The process
parameter list is now open.
2 Push the '+' button until 'End' is displayed.

• 3

4
Push the 'ENTER' button and the '+' button at
the same time. 'Install' will show flashing on
the display.
Use the' +' button to select a list.
5 Use the 'Enter' button to enter into the
selected list.
6 To leave the list, push the '+' and the '-'
buttons at the same time.
7 To leave the menu, press the '+' button
repeatedly until 'Exit' is displayed. Push the
'ENTER' button .

1810897-02 5
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS

2 Installation Parameters
The installation parameters must be set before
the initial start-up and before process
parameters are set. These parameters rarely
need to be adjusted again. If a new parameter
value is to be stored, it is necessary to go through
the whole list, and confirm at the end.

[IIO'f£J
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for injuries
and damage caused by usage of parameter values
which are not in proximity to the factory values set


by Alfa Laval.

• In4 625 100,150


600, 605
610,615
625,635

1810897-02 7
2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

In 20 120 0- 999 seconds Steam-valve run time


Activated when Steam is selected in
In 18

8 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 2 INSTALLATION PARAMETERS

Parameter Description

l""iN
Mr,,"" 'ill
"""''''_",c;", ~:,,8.
o- 240 seconds Change-over valve V1 temp. alarm
delay
Prevents false alarm due to any
fluctuations in temperature caused
by valve actions.

1810897-02 9
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 3 PROCESS PARAMETERS

3 Process Parameters
The process parameters can be adjusted easily
and as often as required, even during operation,
to meet changes in the operating conditions, e.g.
time between sludge discharges, oil temperature,
alarm points.

[II01'£J
Regularly check the condition of the bowl. If there is
no noticeable amount of hard sludge in the sludge
space, the discharge interval may be increased by 30
minutes at a time. The total discharge interval must
not exceed three times the factory set value in order

• to avoid an uneven build-up of sludge.

Parameter Factory set Plant Range Description


value set
value
Prl See tiillieT!lIl 1 - 999 minGtes Time to discharge
page,t5'?
:._~.,'

Pr2 HF380 MOO = Marine Diesel Oil Oillype


GO = Gas Oil
IFxxx = Intermediate Fuel Oil (xxx represents viscosity in Cst at
HFxxx= Heavy Fuel Oil 50'C)

LO TP = Lubricating Oil for Trunk


Piston Engines
LO CH = Lubricating Oil for Cross

• Pr3 OPIoc
Head Engines
OPloc = Local OP In con1rol
OPrem = Remote OP
Rmind = Remind using Sattbus
Control location
OPIoc is standard. OPrem, ExtPC
and RemSW are shown only wilen
installed.
ExtPC = Extem Computer Board
RemSw = Remote switches
PrS 0.0 0.0 = Not used Countdown service timer
0.1 to 1O.Oxl 000 hours Action is to be taken when the timer
reaches O.

1810897-02 11
3 PROCESS PARAMETERS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

Parameter Factory set Plant Range Description


value set
value

Pr 7 o Information Keys to special functions used by


service engineer
1 = timers shown
2 = service mode When Pr7 is set to 1 during normal
operation. the actual timer is
displayed if the '+' button is pressed
once.

Pr15 0.1 0.00 - 5.00 bar Low feed pressure limit



Pr 17 HFO/LO low temp. limit
0-255"F

12 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 3 PROCESS PARAMETERS

Parameter Factory set Plant Range Description


value set
value
Pr18 9SoC 0-1l0°Cor HFOILO setpoint )
'
0-240°F Setpoint for feed temperature is valid
only when a temperature controller,is
o= Temp sensor disabled
installed in the EPC.
Pr19 40°C 0-11SoCor ~---
DO high temp. limit
0-25SoF
PrZO 20°C 0 11S"Cor DO low temp. limit
0-2SSoF
Pr 21 30°C 0-1l0°Cor DO setpoint )
'
0-240°F Setpoint for feed temperature is valid
only when a temperature controller is
installed in the EPC.


Pr 22 40 10-500% P--constant
"
Preset value based on experie
;q{"igf
......1.2 di%ih ""
0.1 - 10.0 minutes
with Aija Laval Healpacheaters.
1~~onstant1)
Pr 23 m

Preset value based on experience


with Ma Laval Healpac heaters.
'agefWiilar'ii\" e,la,,'~'
,.,'8::;-, *
68)- '><,dAli
Pr 27 o 0-9 Separators in series. Purrtier and
Clarifier.
The value is taken from InS for
clarifier. Must be the same value in
both clarifier and purifier.
Pr 28 2 1-4 ---~-n1"---"::S~ludge discharge signal"'fro-m~pu"""rifi6=''''-r~j
to clarifier.
o = No discharge signal to clarifler

• Pr 31 -O.OS
1 =Every purifier discharge
2 = Every 2nd purifier discharge
3 = Every 3rd purifier discharge
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _""-'4 = Every 4th purifier discharge

± 1.00 bar PTl decrease at discharge


Alarm limit if In6 = No

I) Parameter appears only when heater board installed.

1810897-02 13
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS

4 Factory Set Parameters

PlU'ameler Faclotyset Plant set Range Description


val_ value
Fa 10 See table page 0-13300 rpm High speed
17 o =sensor disabled
Fa 11 See table page 0-12000 rpm Low speed
17
Fa 12 300 0-2000 rpm Speed decrease during discharge
Alarm limit if In6 = Yes
Fa 16 0.30 I...".O.-:oo-=---:2.-:50,."....~ ........._ ....... I~ShutdOWn limit for sep-ara-t,...or""spI~'-"'·oo"'-Ie

Fa 17 0.20
·1-~~~--1·---
0.00 = sensor disabled
0.00 - 2.50
.........".----1 ampl~ude
--------1
Vibration prewarning

• Fa 18 0.5 +O-;o:-:.00~-~2;:'.";:50;:-----!"""I"'7Vi;;;,b~ration sensor a""'dl""·u...,stm-ent zero


point. Zero point should be wi!lJi(l.l ~iJ
± Fa 18 _~ 3:~q

When expected feedback from a timer is given,


the timer is interrupted and the next timer
starts.
If feedback is not received within the preset
time, an alarm is given.

• Timers for start are 50 - 59.


Timers for operation are 60 - 69.
Timers for discharge are 70 - 79.
Timers for stop are 80 - 89.
If pump is started independent of Alfa Laval
starter, X6:4 - X40 must be connected to a free
closing contact at the external pump contactor.

1810897-02 15
4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

Parameter Plant set Range Description


value

li~.&• • •"
Separator start-up

Ti55 See table on 0- 120 minutes Max. time for 'Standby' mode. During
page 17 o ~ no standby 'Standby' mode, the system is
waiting for an order to start the
process sequence. The process
sequence is started with a push of
the start button.
When Ti 55 ~ 0 the process starts
without delay.
;y~~

t\i:®f -.-_ .'"'''


~:""
Jil60 sm:2flO s,
o- 30 seconds

16 1810897-02
P·TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 4 FACTORY SET PARAMETERS

Parameter Factory set Plant set Range Description


value value
Ti 82 5 o- 300 seconds Heater off.
Addition of water. This is so that the
bowl is kept mled during stop
sequence rdoes
not apply in clarifier
mode). ~;
..:J{.
TI85 5 0- 30 minutes Temperature decrease
The EPC switches the separator
motor off.
Decreasing oil feed temperature
greater than 5 ·C expected.
If Ti 85 ; O. no temperature control.
Ti86 3 0- 30 minutes Check m6fur off
Ti 87 60 o- 300 seconds Pump off. TImer interrupted by


feedback signal.
Ti 89 30 o- 60 minutes Waiting for zero speed.

Parameters depending on separator size

separator size Pr1 Ti55 ·Ti 62 Ti63 Ti 72 Ti77 Fa 10 FaH


PlOD, 150 30 60 40 20 10 10 . .
P 600, 60S, 610, 615
P625
.- ~60-
.-
-
0 - -15 5 6 .- 5-'0 13300 11000
9900-
P635 60 0 15 9 10 9 11000

1810897-02 17
5 SEOUENCE DIAGRAM P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

5 Sequence Diagram

Preparation for start Start separation


Timer 50 ) 52 2) 53 3 ) 55 60 61 62 63 4)
64 66 5) 68
'
Time 60s 4m 15m O/60s 5.011.0 s 15 s 15/4Os S6) 30s 10s 60m
Feed pump motor
".., .~ - .;@ =',",
Sepa;ator motoF , , , - ' WriP
. ~
-- "
'k
._. -_ .
SV15
I-
SV16 - -- - 1- - - ._- - - - 7) "

••••
SV 10
. . ..".
- I- - .- - ,- - - - ,-


V1

Sludge pump
-- 6)
••••
1) Interrupted by Contactor feedback signal
2) Interrupted when speed> low limit (if speed sensor is present)
3) Temperature should increase with 5°C or above low limit. Alarm is activated if not so within the timer
4) Not used for Clarifier
5) Only if In15 = yes
6) Depending on separtor size. see table on page 17.
7) 1 second every 5 minutes
8) Sludge pump activated for 5 seconds every 30 minutes

[MOTE]
Note! This diagram is valid for normal operation only.
See the flow chart on page 22 for a more detailed
sequence description.

18 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM

• 1)

2)
Ti 70 is interrupted by feedback signal (Iow pressure on PT4)
Ti 79 is not used in stop sequence discharge if Purifier
Not used for clarifier
3) Only if In15 = yes
4) Interrupted by decreasing temperature
5) Interrupted by decreasing speed (if speed sensor is present)
6) Interrupted by feedback signal (Feed Pump Motor)
7) Interrupted by Zero speed (if speed sensor is present)
8) Depending on separtor size. See table on page 17.
9) 5 minutes after separator motor is stopped, SV16 is activated for 1 second

Flow rates for P 100, P 150, P 600, P 605, P 610, P 615


SV10: 8.0 I/m
SV15: 181/m

• SV16: 0.9 I/m

Flow rates for P 625, P 635


SV10: 15.0 I/m
SV15: 11.0 I/m
SV16: 2.8 I/m

1810897-02 19
5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

5.1 Separation Sequence


Timer Action ~Alarms

T160=5 sec. Discharge


SV 15 To ensure that the operating system gets sufficient
water before closing.

Ti 61 = 15 sec. Draining 01 operating water

Ti 62 = 15 or 40 sec. Bowl closing


SV 16

Ti 63 = 5 or 20 sec.
SV 10

Ti 64 = 30 sec.
Filling 01 sealing water

Feed on to separator 'Oil backpressure PT4 - LOW'



V1 Alarm is given if no pressure
response in oil outlet within
Ti 64.

Ti 68 = 60 or 30 min. separation During separation all necessary


functions are supervised.
V1 (SV16) Closing water is fed for 1 sec. every 5 minutes.

20 1610697-02
P-1YPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM

1810897-02 21
5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

EPC 50 Sequences Process Start

Assembled ,,~0~_.r-;:t8r1cliit.1
N
according to '> n
manual?

Yes

Ti50-53 Sep.
start and temp
check

Ti55 Standby.
Push
Separation to
continue •
Ti 60 Discharge

Ti62 Bowl
closing

Ti63 Sealing
water (Not as claritier)

Separation Ti64 F ed on

Ti68 Time to
discharge
No
Stop?
Yes

Ti68 No
elapsed?

Yes
Yes

Discharge

22 1810897-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST 5 SEQUENCE DIAGRAM

Discharge Stop

Ti70 Feed off Ti82 Water into


bowl.Heater off

Ti72
t
Displacement Ti85 Sep. motor
of oil off. Check

,
decreasing temp

Ti86 Heater
cooling. Check
Ti76 Closing

,
motor off
water

• Stop?
No
).----1.-1 Ti790~eed HL-_
Ti66
,
Ti87 Pump off

,
_ _ __ Ti89 Waiting for
O-speed

Yes
Stands!.

Stop

1810897-02 23
P.type Separation System ~

Alarms and Fault Finding ~


Printed Sep 2008
Book No. 1810898-02 V 4

Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.

Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or


suggestions for improvement of this publication would be

gratefully appreciated.

Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local


Alfa Laval company.

Published by: Alfa Laval Tumba AB


Marine & Diesel Equipment
SE - 14780 Tumba
Sweden

@ Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2008.


Contents

1 Alarms 2
1.1 Alarm Functions 2
1.2 Reading Alarm History List 2
1.2.1 Alarm message explanation: 3
1.3 Alarm Reset 3
1.4 Abnormalities not displayed .4

2 Display Alarms and Actions 5


3 Alarm Tests 18

1810898-02
1 AlARMS P-lYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

1 Alarms
1.1 Alarm Functions
The alann system is designed to ensure a safe
separation system.
All alarms are shown on the operator panel
display, and most of them are complemented by
light emitting diodes (LEDs).
The alarms are displayed in order of occurrence.

1.2 Reading Alarm History


List
To read the stored list of alarms, proceed as
follows:

• Push' Enter'.

• Push '+' until 'End' is displayed.

• Push 'Enter' and' +' at the same time.

• Push '+' repeatedly until 'AL list' is displayed.

• Push 'Enter'.

• Go through the list using the' +' pushbutton


until 'End' is displayed.

• Push 'Enter'.


• Push '+' repeatedly until 'Exit' is displayed.

• Push 'Enter' to return to normal display.

2 1810898-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 1 ALARMS

1.2.1 Alarm message explanation:


The display shows:

Alarm no. 5 Alarm number


0:13 This alarm occurred 13 minutes ago.
Feed pressure low Type of alarm
P1 60 Parameter Pr 1 was set to 60 minutes.
00:02:13 The alarm was reset after 2 minutes 13 seconds.

1.3 Alarm Reset

• ~Af4tl'tlG
? '.-A.,,:,

Breakdown hazard
Never reset an alarm without first finding and
remedying the cause.

1 Acknowledge the alarm signal by pressing the , ,


~.~
alarm push button. , ,'
The flashing LED then changes to steady

2
shine.
Remedy the cause.
~ ALARM

3 Reset the alarm function by pressing the


alarm push button a second time. o

~
The LED will go out.

• It is possible to reset the system without


remedying the cause, but the alarm signal will
ALARM

be repeated.

Risk of injury
Never return to the operator panel to acknowledge or
reset an alarm if doing so is by any means
hazardous.

1810898-02 3
1 ALARMS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

1.4 Abnormalities not


displayed
There are some abnormalities not shown on the
display. Below are listed the most common:

Why? What to do

Smell • Normal occurrence during start None.'


, ..,-"y","
while the friction blocks are -; l.o,
slipping.

• Oil level in oil sump too low. Check oil level and iidt(6if if' ';
::.necessary. "'!i>:X<'

Noise • Height position of paring disc is


incorrect.

• Bearing(s) damaged or worn.

• Improper bowl assembly


I 'Stop the separator,measure and
i adjust the height.

Renew all bearings.

! ,Check andreasserritjle.

Unsetlsfactory separation result • Incorrect separation
temperature.

• Throughput too high. 'Adjust.


;,
• Disc stack is clogged. , Clean disc stack.

• Sludge space in bowl is filled. i Clean and reduce the lirite


~ ,
ik' between
,- sludge
.. discharges.
.. _.c ,;

• Bowl speed too iow. " ~amine the,'11_01?r:,,"i!Jpo~er\_ii


: t!'8nsmlsslon for correct,freque.ncyd
~,:~~rts. _ _ .'. .'. "., ~ 1

• Bowl rotates in wrong direction


~ ~~eck belt and '~~i:lpling;pa(js
,
,
':tWi.,
, Check the electrical connections
;; to the motor.
"

%'~': '~l ,"

4 1810898-02
P-lYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS

2 Display Alarms and Actions

on page on page

Bowl speed sensor· ERROR


D 10 Local OP in control
D 16

Bowl speed· HIGH 9 NO SIGNAL FROM EXTRA INPUT X6:8 16

Bowl speed· LOW 9 Oil backpressure PT4 - HIGH 14

• xxxxx board· ERROR

Communication· ERROR xxxxx

Computer board· ERROR


17

17

17
Oil backpressure PT4 - LOW

Oil feed temperature - HIGHxxxxx

Oil feed temperature· LOWxxxxx


14

11

12

Discharge feedback - ERROR 13 OIL PRESSURE PT4 HIGH DURING Ti70 15

Emergency stop - BUTTON PUSHED 11 Oil pressure sensor PT4 • ERROR 14

Feed flow PT1 • ERROR DURING Tixx 13 Parameter xx:xx· ILLEGAL 17

Feed pressure PT1 - HIGH 15 Parameters changes - LOCKED 15

Feed pressure PT1 - LOW 15 POWER FAILURE 16

• Feed pressure sensor PT1 • ERROR

Heater· FAULT

Heater board· ERROR


15

16

17
Pump starter· FAILURE

Separator motor· FAILURE

Separator run-up - TO LONG


15

13

10

High frequency xxxx Hz 7 Series communication· ERROR 13

High vibration· WARNING 8 Service alarm 17

High vibration - SHUTDOWN 7 Sludge tank level - HIGH 10

10 expansion board - ERROR 17 Switch power offlon 17

IP address· FAULT 15 Temperature increase· TOO SLOW 17

Level switch· DISABLED 17 Temperature alarm sensor - ERROR 12

1810898-02 5
2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

on page

1J13
Temperature control sensor - ERROR

Vibration board - ERROR 17

Vibration sensor· ERROR 8

6 1610696-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS

Why? What to do

High vibration· SHUTDOWN • Sludge remaining in part of the Dismantle, clean and check the
bowl bowl before restart. See Service
Manual.

Disintegration hazards
If excessive vibration occurs, stop Disintegration hazard
separator and keep bowl filled with
The separator bowl must be
liquid during rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be manually cleaned before starting

• identified and corrected before the


separator is restarted.

• Bowl wrongly mounted


• Disc stack compression incorrect
up again.

Check assembly. See Service


Manual.

• Bowl assembled with parts from


other separators

• Height position of paring disc is Stop the separator, measure and if


incorrect. necessary adjust the height.

• Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle.

• Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.

• The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame fElet.

• Spindle top bearing spring Renew all springs.


broken.

• High frequency xxxx Hz • Frequency deviation more than Check power supply
+5%

1810898-02 7
2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

Why? What to do

High vibration - WARNING • Sludge remaining in part of the Dismantle, clean and check the
bowl bowl before restart.

Disintegration hazard
The separator bowl must be
manually cleaned before starting
up again.

• Bowl wrongly mounted


• Disc stack compression incorrect
• Bowl assembled with parts from
other separators
Check assembly. See Service
Manual.


• Height position of paring disc is Stop the separator, measure and if
incorrect. necessary adjust the height.

• Bowl spindle bent. Renew the bowl spindle.

• Bearing(s) damaged or worn. Renew all bearings.

• The frame feet are worn out. Renew the frame feet.

• Spindle top bearing spring Renew all springs.


broken.

Vibration sensor - ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Replace sensor. If no spare sensor
available, set parameter Fa 16 =
0.0 to be able to run the system.

8 1810898-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS

Why? What to do

Bowl speed· HIGH • High power (net) frequency Check power supply before
restart.

• Incorrect transmission parts


(50 Hz belt pulley and belt for
60 Hz power supply).

Disintegration hazard
Stop and change the belt
transmission to suit the power
supply frequency.

• Bowl speed· LOW • Slipping belt

• Worn coupling pads

• Speed sensor faulty


Change belt.

Check I change pads.

Check speed sensor

• Bowl not properly closed Check closing water supply (valve


SV 16).
Check bowl operating system for
leakage.
Check nozzle.

• Bowl not properly assembled Check that the lock ring is in


place.

• Low power net frequency Check power.

• Motor failure. Repair the motor.

• • Bearing(s) damaged.

• Incorrect transmission parts (60


Hz belt pulley and belt for 50 Hz
power supply).
Renew all bearings.

Disintegration hazard
Stop and change the belt
transmission to suit the power
supply frequency.

1B10898-02 9
2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

Why? What to do

Bowl speed sensor· ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Replace sensor, If no spare sensor
available set parameter In 6 No=
to be able to run the system.

Sludge tank level - HIGH • Pump has not drained the tank Check the pump function.

Separator run-up - TO LONG • Separator coupling slipping Check the coupling.

• Belt slipping Check the belt.

• Height position of paring disc is Stop. Check and adjust the height.
incorrect.

• Motor failure

• Bearing(s) damaged or worn.

• Separator start bullon not


Repair the motor.

Renew all bearings.

Push start button.



pushed.

10 1810898-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS

Why? Whatlodo

Emergency stop - BunON PUSHED • Emergency button pushed Remedy cause for pushing button.
Reset push button.

Oil feed temperature - HIGHxxxxx • Steam supply valve faulty Investigate cause and remedy.

• Faulty triac module(s) in the If relay K11 is on:


power unit or faulty controller in
Disconnect X12:10.
the control unit. (electric heater)
If the temparature is faUing,
replace the control module in the

• control unit.
If tha temperature is not failing,
replace the triac module(s).
If relay K11 is off, but contactor
K12, K16, or K17 is on, and the
temperature is not falling:
Check if powar is supplied from
the control unit to the contactor
which is on (X12:6 - X12:12, X12:7
, - X12:12, X12:9 - X12:12).lf It is,
replace the control module in the
control unit.

• Broken wiring or defective heater Check adjustment of P and I


resistance, or faulty controller in functions in the control unit.
the control unit.
If contactor sequence correct:
Check wiring and heater


resistance of each block or heater
element. see EHM heater
component booklet.
If contactor sequence not correct:
Replace the control module In the
control unit.

1810898-02 11
2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

Why? What to do

Oil feed temperature - LOWxxxxx • Heater cl09ged Investigate cause and remedy.
• Steam supply insufficient
• Steam trap faulty
• Steam supply valve faulty

• Faulty fuses or burned Check and renew broken fuses.


contactors Reset overcurrent protection
(electric heater) (applicable for 817 - 24/22 kW
power unit).
Check wiring and contactor coils.

Temperature alarm sensor - ERROR


• Broken wiring or defective heater
resistance
(electric heater)

• Short circuit / broken sensor or


Check wiring and heater
resistance of each block or heater
element. See the service Manual
booklet.

Disconnect cable at sensor.



cable. Measure resistance between 1-3.
Resistance shall be within 10G-142
ohms = G-110 C 132-230 F.
Test of EPC 50 input;
• Disconnect cables from sensor,
(terminal X 5;1-2-3).
• Move jumpers Xj1 and Xj2
upwards - from Normal to Test.
(The jumpers can be found in
the upper left corner of the VO
Board)


• Indication within 50-60 C when
OK.
• If no spare sensor available set
=
parameter Pr 16 0, or if control
sensor free, move connection
to that one.

12 1810898-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS

Why? What to do

Temperature control sensor· ERROR • Short circuit I broken sensor or Disconnect cable at sensor.
cable. Measure resistance between 1·3.
Resistance shall be within 100·142
ohms = 0-110 C 132·230 F. If no
spare sensor available set
parameter Pr 18 = O. Heater Is then
out of function.

Feed flow PT1 - ERROR DURING Tlxx • Pump not working Check pump.
• Pressure in feed line too low Check feed line.

• Feedback signal from contactor Check the contactor function.


Separator motor· FAILURE
K 2 missing Input terminal
X 6:5 In EPC 50.

Series communication· ERROR • Communication between Check the Sattbus connection.


separators in series interrupted

Discharge feedback· ERROR If In 6 = yes


Speed not decreased (Fa12) as
discharge feedback.
If In 6 = no
PT1 pressure not decreased (Pr 31)
as discharge feedback.

• Check setting on Fa 12 or Pr 31

• Strainer in the operating water Clean the strainer.


supply is clogged.

• Water flow too low. Check opening water. Valve SV 15

• • Hoses between the supply


valves and separator are
incorrectly fitted.
Fit hoses correctly.

1810898-02 13
2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

Why? What to do

Oil backpressure PT4 - LOW Broken water seal due to:

• Strainer in operating water high Clean strainer.


pressure side clogged, or water Make sure that the water pressure
pressure too low. Is 200 - 600 kPa (2 - 6 bar).

• Seal rings in bowl defective. Install new seal rings.

• MV 10 not opening. Examine the electrical system and


correct the fault (open circuit, low
or high voltage or dirt).


• Decreased throughput Check feed pump and adjust flow.

• Regulating valve open too much Adjust back pressure valve

• Change over valve V1 in Check air pressure, solenoid valve


recirculation position SV1 and output from EPC 50
terminal X 8:1-X 41.

Bowl opens unintentionally during


operation because:

• Strainer in the operating water Clean the strainer.


supply is clogged.

• No water in the operating water Check the operating water system


system. and make sure any supply valves
are open.

• Hoses between the supply Fit hoses correctly.


valves and separator are
incorrectly fitted.

• Nozzle in bowl body clogged

• Rectangular ring in discharge


slide is defective.

• Valve plugs are defective.


Clean the nozzle.

Renew the rectangular ring.

Renew all plugs.



• Supply valve SV15 for opening Rectify the leak.
water is leaking.

Oil backpressure PT4 - HIGH • Increased throughput Check. Reduce backpressure.

• Regulating valve too restricted Adjust valve

Oil pressure sensor PT4 - ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Replace sensor. If no spare sensor
available set parameter Pr 10=0,0
to be able to run the system.

14 1810898-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS

Why? What to do

OIL PRESSURE PT4 HIGH DURING Ti70 • No decrease in oil pressure Check function of change over
during this timer valve V1.

Feed pressure PTl • HIGH • Pipe restricted Check recirculation for· restriction

Feed pressure PTl • LOW • Low flow Check pump and flow regulation.

Check heater for fouling.

Feed pressure sensor PTl • ERROR • Sensor or cable damaged Check cable conneCtions

Replace sensor. If no spare sensor


available set parameter Pr 14=0.0
to be able to run thesystern.

Pump starter· FAILURE • Feedback signal from contaclor Check the contactor funCtion.
K 3 missing
Check inputlermlnal X 9:1 in the
EPC.

Paramelers changes· LOCKED • A code has been sello make Unlock the code.
parameter changes nol possible

IP address· FAULT • Wrong IP address used in Check the selling.


In 27-30

1810898-02 15
2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

Why? What to do

NO SIGNAL FROM EXTRA INPUT X6:8 • Depends on use of the input Depends on use of the input

Heater - FAULT • OV in cable healer X 12:310 EPe Check the power supply to the
50 X 51:4 heater.
(electric healer)

• High temp. switch released Check temp. setpolnt in the


(electric heater) control unit.
Check the heater and clean if
necessary.
When the alarm is reset, the temp.

Local OP in control

POWER FAILURE
• Attempt to operate remote OP

• Black-out has occurred with EPe


in operation
switch is also reset.

Not legal when local OP is active.

Check plant conditions and


restart.

16 1810898-02
P-TYPE SEPARATION SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING 2 DISPLAY ALARMS AND ACTIONS

Why? What to do

Parameter xx:xx • ILLEGAL • If parameters are changed Switch EPC50 power off. Move
automatically by "thunderstorm" X J4 on VOboard to position right.
type influence, alarm is given to Switch power on. Parametllrs are
indicate out of range. now all set to default values. Move
X J4 back to original position.
Adjust all parameter settings to
correct value.

xxxxx board· ERROR • OP (Operator Panel board), Check cables to board or replace
I/O board or OPr (Operator Panel the board (see Change of Circuit
remote board) in EPC not Board in the Service Manual
working booklet).

• Computer board - ERROR

Communication· ERROR xxxxx


• Bad connection

• Board faulty

• Cable errors
Check connection

Replace the board

Check cables to board or replace


the board (see Change of Circuit
Board in the Service Manual
booklet).

Heater board· ERROR • Optional heater board in EPe not Check cables to board or replace
working the board (see Change of Circuit
Board in the Service Manual
booklet).

10 expansion board· ERROR • X71:2 and X71:3 are both set to Set one switch to 0, and the other
o or both selto 1 to 1.

Vibration board· ERROR • Optional vibration board in Epe Check cables to board or replace
not working the board (see Change of Circuit


Board in the Service Manual
booklet).

Temperature increase - TOO SLOW • Insufficient heating during start Check heater function.
(T; 53)

Switch power off/on • Alarm is displayed at standstill Investigate the cause for the stop
after emergency or vibration shut and switch the power off and then
down on to the EPC 50.

Level switch· DISABLED • If Pr 25=0 the high level alarm is Warning to operator only.
disabled

Service alarm • If Pr 5 is used, the text in Pr 6 is Take action according to what the
displayed text means (plant dependant).

1810898-02 17
3 ALARM TESTS PA PURIFIER SYSTEM ALARMS AND FAULT FINDING

3 Alarm Tests

["01'£J
If any parameter value is changed to activate an
alarm, do not forget to reset to the original value
before operation.

Alarm message Red Sequence Method Terminal Reaction


diode
Standard functions
POWER FAILURE Start Switch power off I on during
operation
Feed pressure PT1 • HIGH Start Decrease limit (Pr14)
Feed pressure PT1 • LOW
Feed pressure sensor PT1
ERROR
Start
Start
Increase limit (Pr15)
Disconnect sensor
'$
X5:4

Temperature alarm Sensor·
-"~Wo'

'n $lart Disconnect sensor X5:2


.V10ff
ERROR Heating off.
Oil back pressure PT4· HIGH PT4 Separation Increase back pressure V1 off
Oil back pressure PT4 • LOW PT4 Separation Decrease back pressure V1 off
Oil pressure sensor PT4 - PT4 Separation Disconnect sensor X5:6
ERROR
Emergency stop • BUTTON Push the button
PUSHED

Optional functions
),-


Temperature control sensor· Start Disconnect
ERROR
Heater· FAULT (Heatpac power Heater Start Disconnect X51:4
unit only)
Temperature increase· TOO TT Start Start separator and EPe but
SLOW not heater, or start system
with Ti 53 set to 1.

18 1810898-02
PA615PurifierSysfem ~

~
Installation System Reference
Printed Sep 2008
Book No. 577215.02 Rev. 6

Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB Sep 2008


This publication or any part there of may not be reproduced or
transmitted by any process or means without prior written
permission of Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents

1 Technical Data 5
1.1 Demand Specification Water 5
1.2 Demand Specifications Air 5
1.3 System Data 6

2 Drawings 8
2.1 Flow Chart 8
2.2 Drawings 9
.2.2.1 P 615 Separator Mounting Drawing, DIN 9
2.2.2 P 615 Separator Mounting Drawing with Sludge Removal Kit, DIN 10
2.2.3 P 615 Separator Mounting Drawing, JIS 11


2.2.4 P 615 Separator Mounting Drawing with Sludge Removal Kit, JIS 12
2.2.5 P 615 Separator Basic Size Drawing 13
2.2.6 P 615 Separator Foundation Drawing 14
2.2.7 Valve Block Water Dimension Drawing 15
2.2.8 Control Unit EPC 50 Dimension Drawing 16
2.2.9 Starter Dimension Drawing 17
2.3 Electrical System Layout 18
2.4 Electrical Diagrams 19
2.4.1 Cable List 19
2.4.2 Interconnection Diagram, Starter 22
2.4.3 Interconnection Diagram, Starter, cant. 23
2.4.4 Interconnection Diagram, Transmitters 24
2.4.5 Interconnection Diagram, Solenoid Valves 25
2.4.6 Interconnection Diagram, Solenoid Valves cant. 26
2.4. 7 Interconnection Diagram, Optional Equipment.. 27
2.4.8 Circuit Diagram, Power Circuits 28

• 3
2.4.9 Circuit Diagram, Separator Starter and Feed Pump
2.4.10 Circuit Diagram, ESD-relay and Trip Contacts (optional)

Remote Supervision
29
30

32

4 Specifications 34
4.1 Cables 34
4.2 Cable Routing 35
4.3 Oil, Water, Steam, and Condensate Piping 35
4.4 Ambient Temperature Limitation 36
4.5 Sludge Tank 36
4.6 Sludge Piping 38

5 Commissioning and Initial Start 40


5.1 Completion Check List 40
5.2 Initial Start-up 42
5.2.1 Calculating Operating Pressure 44

577215-02
6 Shut·down and Storage 45
6.1 Shut·down after Use 45
6.2 Protection and Storage 46
6.3 Reassembly and Start up 47

577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 1 TECHNICAL OATA

1 Technical Data
1.1 Demand Specification Water
Alia Laval ret 574487 rev. 1

Poor quality of the operating water may with time cause erosion, corrosion and / or
operating problems. The water shall be treated to meet certain demands.

1 Turbidity-free water, solids content <0,001% by volume.


Max. particle size 50 ~m.
Deposits shall not be allowed to form in certain areas in the system.
2 Total hardness less than 180 mg CaC03 per litre, which corresponds to 10 °dH or 12,5 °E. Hard

• 3
water may with time form deposits in the operating mechanism. The precipitation rate is
accelerated with increased operating temperature and low discharge frequency. These effects
become more severe the harder the water is.
Chloride content max. 100 ppm NaCI (equivalent to 60 mg CI/I). Chloride ions contribute to
corrosion on surfaces in contact with the operating water. Corrosion is a process that is
accelerated by increased separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion concentration.

4 6,5 < pH < 9


Bicarbonate content (HC03) min. 70mg HC0 3 per litre, which corresponds to 3,2 °dKH.

(tlOT£]
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences
arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating
water supplied by the customer.

• 1.2 Demand Specifications Air


Specific requirements regarding the quality
of air (tlOT£]
1 Pressure 500 - 700 kPa (5 - 7 bar). Electrical interconnections must be made by
qualified electricians.
2 Free from oil, and solid particles larger than Mechanical Interconnections must be made by
0.01 mm. qualified mechanical technicians.

3 Dry, with dew point min. 10°C below


ambient temperature.

577215·02 5
1 TECHNICAL DATA PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

1.3 System Data

Oil inlet Max. 4 bar


Oil outlet
Sludge outlet from separator
Sludge outlet from sludge pump


Overhaul every 8000 hours or 12 months operation

6 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 1 TECHNICAL DATA

Separation System Planned Maintenance Kits

• With delivery Inspection


Tools

577215-02 7
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

2 Drawings
2.1 Flow Chart

Starter

l!J


IS'


--------------

II-.l!:~k .
501 Operating air

l1t~I\ ~I1'i'¥1tJt!

Ref. 576791 Rev. 1

8 577215-02
:D,-------------------------------------------,
~
• • 11)

JI)
~

:Ii
"'1
~ U>

'" ~

":DC
~ a
w
:D
o
"
ell
~
i1
:nm
:D
_.
CD (IJ

'"'"
UI -<
Starler
o ee
00
en E (IJ
-;
m
ID ~
S;

: L ~-----
"Dl.
AI caIII Z
~r
~----------------------~

'''''''''
11
11
11
11
11
11
.!I:
0 ~
-;
is
z
(IJ
11 11
-<

.._.
0
11 11 (IJ
11 11
,, 11
11
11
11
C
::I
-;
m
,, '--' S;
:D
L ~----
::I m
."
la m
:D
m
I:' Z
Dl 0
m

-----------,
46s:!:i ,
_.
E
::I
I la

-
w
I I:'
Z

S1'iuS

222 221

::!I::
rr==='jl (.1/+1,5 bar) 'j'=--i' (0-6 bar)

11
:1.:
~==h
gauge

Pl
I1
Vacuum :: :
~I I1 Pressure
:..: gauge
I.

~= =~

~"==3-<rcy
M~,.. '"=~ . . ---pJ
1.. __ .1 1. __ .1

,,
r- ----- --,, Feed pump '"
o
,, ,,,
.,) Nipple 576792-<11 121 6.2 'or GO/MDQ
Nipple 576792·03 0 6.5 for HFOIlO
:L --I.
.J Z
~
''')Nlpple 576792-0212124 for oil outlet
Gl
'" (IJ

X023158D
~
• '"0
~ :D

;"'fbd- ~ ~
206 zCV
Starter
0 "...en [J)

~
066
00
1 Ut
en
CD

".ill
III

.0
I:

709 Mains supply: 3x230/400l4401


.0
C
::I
••
::I
lA
48015751690 V AC
!Cl
";g~]'50?ffcrrN
V~ ill
:lE
••
::I
lA "U

..en
:l••
:r
E
l>
"i
'"c
"U

-
:D
'ii
C
m
:D
CL [J)
-<
lA [J)
CD -<
m
52,5 ~
L
21 Z
CD
..,,, a0 [J)

~
r
C S
-..
III
~
••
0
z
~
[J)
• -<
m

..) Nipple 576792-01 0 8.2lor GOIMOO


Nipple 578792·030 6.5IorHFOIlO
-
!Cl
Z
~
:D
..,
m
m
:D
"')Nippl& 576792.Q2 0 24 lor 011 outlet
m
Z
0
m
X023860B

• •
~--------------------------------------------------------------,
• • N
~
'"
--J ---------~
i.I
~
(0
::rJ
~ ':J
PT!

J1. S~rt" [jl ! "...


Gl

.r+'~'--<l-] ~ oB e ~ Cl!
'" o 0 ~ Ul
PT< : l -@- _ iAI
":J
,~~
J1. ~----------------------,

..
r...- -......~
""
,,
,,
,,
,,,
...
Al
o
I
I
""
""
. ,,
,
I:
o
,,,
11 11

,
11
""-'
11
c
L ~----J a
S'
la
Cl
_._-_. ----I Al
GS E
••
:::l
la
~

-
C.
Ul

515.25

222 221
~1~P~I:~(-1/+'.5bar)
:1 11Vacuum
:r~=-"'1l (O-6bar)
I: PI :1 Pressure
,
"
11 I: gauge 11 11 gauge
11 1 11 11 •
1
371 L!::: =,h PI ~= =:!l I
-l-~HlJ:Nmi-'t'H-, '200-r,;"\f~_~_JiO--
""----'I . . .-~}_0+-I-'1.-- -I
---v----t;;:>'
,,
~
~ __ ~ L __ ~ ~

r- -----
I
--I
I Feed pump
,, ,,
, , '"o
..) Nipple 576792.()1 08.2 for GO/MOO :L -4.
~
..J
NIpple 576792·03 0 6.51or HFOILO
••O)Nlpple 576792.Q2 0 24lor 011 oullet
Z
Gl
(f)

X023759C
~

f\l JJ
m-
~
• '"0
~
en
"
00 ••
~
Z
I\)
G)

..."
el If)

JJ ell
CO
<: Cl!
w
en
CD
"it
AI
...
..
0
I:
0
c:
...••
:::l
:::l
CA
.
~
AI
:E
••
Connections :::l
CA j;
."El ~~IS25A
x= 19 r& l
»fifffX1h.
:E ~
C Water pipe connection
...
•• l1'

;rt:.=--
ISO G-1/2 size -U
:r C

-
:IJ

lO'
en ;;
in
E Ventilation pipe 2" size c: :IJ
CL ~
"··w_· X"";";·.i);~t¥iiO.i . ~
.. .
. .' CA
52,5 F N""'!I!i~lb~ ~
<Jk~t, . ' CD m
;;:
Intemalllexible connectIon
(enclosed with Alfa Laval
:11 z
CD
-,,
,
delivery)
a ~
r
~AI ~
-••
~
is
z
...

If)

~
-<
m

..) Nipple 576792.Q1 (21 8.21or GOIMDO


Nipple 576792-03 0 6,5 'or HFOIlO
-
C.
en
;;:
:IJ
m
."
m
:IJ
"'jNipple 576792·02 (21 24 for 011 outlet m
Z
0
m
X023861e

• •
~~------------------,11:1

• • ~
':1
•11:1
~
Connection 201 and 220 turnable 90' ClI '"c"
~
:rJ
All connections to be installed non- Maximum horizontal
"llI ';;
:rJ
CD
loaded and flexible displacement at the
inlet! outlet connections
...
Cb m
:rJ
'Q
'"'"
ClI (f)
during operation ± 20
Maximum vertical mm en
ID
--i
m
s::

....
displacement at the solid "llI Z
Dl
;t'~~~~~3~'=i
(f)

u
phase outlet connection during"
operation ± 10 mm
;;
Dl
0 S
5
m z
890 Dl 'Q
807 807 _.
III (f)
--i
m
rh==J ;$ n s::
552
~~ _.
en :rJ
m
;
."
490
I I 453 429
m
:rJ
~~4p
372 m

,I
I
140
I 74
Q.~ ..

j
0

11
/ / / /
39
I
254

,I 1-
/ / D:14~
I O-G 1/2
a
il
l_.
z
"
m
I
I
:::I t
181 l'so-c 1/2 la I
1
1 7
.-:~
J
(ISO-C'J/4) ISO-C 7/2
1r!
All dimensions are nominal.
(~]j3 22b (2~
~. 455 Resevtion for individual
I deviations due to tolerances
163
I ~~
I o-c /4

481
732

'"o
~
Z

X023757A
'"
(f)
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

2.2.6 P 615 Separator Foundation Drawing

Min. lifting capacity required


when doing service: 300 kg

5IXJ

Max. height of largest


component incl. lifting tool.

111/0 It;"

Recommended free floor space for


unloading when doing service.

No fixed installation within this area

Centre of gravity (complete machine)



Vertical force not exceeding 5 kNlfoot

Horizontal force not exceeding 7 kNItoot

Total static load max. 4 kN

Centre of separator bowl

8 holes for foundation bolts

Ref. 548711 Rev. 2

14 577215-02

~,-------------------------------------------------,

Connector is not delivered with symbol:
article no. 1765927-04 1765927-03
1765921-01,1165921·02,1165927·04.
1765927-01 1765927-02

if13'l" ifW
194
"
rI
A

: L ~ L
T
~

L _
i
i
!
~
G112 G1/2
Delivered with valve block:
45 Drain G112
Hose engt· mm
H ner-4s 40 20

1765921-02
1765921-03

X023367A
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

2.2.8 Control Unit EPC 50 Dimension Drawing

Operating panel

Separator inter lock


indication (opti onal) ,l
\ 481

~, ~
.914xl

Emergency stop,
--.. ..... \ se parator
Sludge valve ~
r--- ~~~=1 \
V
\
interlock indication
(optional)
~ ~
-\,_'nr 5! (0)' On -off, feed
~ ~
pu mp
!or
~


~ ,J..
~ \01'-...

~ffi f-on -off,


se parator

BJ
5lI

Q, \-I Plugged holes


for extra cable
glands
V
~

~I
:1 I [ 1:
id ;sw •
24VAc 5OI6OJiz
70 VA (+200 VA for VD)

- - - - Optional

Ref. 568304

16 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 2 DRAWINGS

2.2.9 Starter Dimension Drawing

.,

• '"
I

II~
0
0
N

11

I
~

-
~ B
0
L
0
on

• 500
Technical Data
Mains supply

Current ranges -
3><230. 400, 440, 400, 575,
690 V AC Max fuse 40 A

Acc. to order (for separator


2.5-16 A andforpumpO.4-10 A)
_supply to EPC 230 V, 300 VA
.
Weight 25-30kg

Ref. 571340 Rev. 0

577215-02 17
:0.----------------------------------------.....,
~
~

'"0
:D
on W l>
:;;
Cl Z
~
~ ~
SUM
m
-..
CD
G>
en

Control unit
Ii" ....... .,. ............... 'il
n Cireutt bof.ra.
U -Communlcatkm
o -l'i8lller oontroI
I -flernote atarn.


0
D
D
D


-- - - - - - - -®- ----
Remote
- -@- T~P~Ai:'
---------@----
Rerrot&

OP unij
Remole
Starter

._.
CO)

CO)

-en
Datl Startf.itop
lb ..!l
- -®- -c;;mm- 11
-®- S"'~

..a
Emergency

, ,, ,
',6' 'C
I~l ~ III
$:$
I I , CD
"-.y-1'
,
I
I
~e..~n!:~o~~~w~c~ _ -@-_
2 .-11
..
SVl
'C
VI
I
I
I
• 0
I
I ---------~:::::::~=~ C
I
I r------~­ ~
:r-----~-
I
I ~
on
IT T( I

r@'! "" r-----@-- "1l


C
l!.a.D o "" r----0-- I :D
'!i
(j'''" ............ = ........... o=act a. I!"
""" I en
:D
aa'l r----@--
IIHeating system
11
I1
11
I
~ d;
r-------- I1
t I
en
-<
"See also for: 11------------------------ ...... ..J I ~
en
"electric heater 1765867 ~------------------------, ~rr~~~:~~~~~~~~~~~--: s:
::steam heater 1765868 D I L .Jl
LS SRK 'lrn SV8 11 I
0. . . . . . . _ I1 I 11 ¥: 11 J Z
~
_OIJ I U I L_-
1r --
I 11 I Sludgell
r
: : : pump 11
I I 11 n
l!:-_-_""IJ""_-_-_..",.-_-_-_-_-_-_-_~
~
': I 6
z
LL::_-:_-::::_-::_-::::::~:::::::::::::::::::::::::~}J
Optional AlIa Laval
delivery en
-<
Functional blOCks ~
en
s:
:D
en
."
en
:D
en
Z
0
en
X023BS7A

• •
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 2 DRAWINGS

2.4 Electrical Diagrams

2.4.1 Cable List


No. Connection point Instruction Connection point Remarks
A B
Power cables (currents according to order)
1 MPRXCX 3x4 Mains supply Starter Fuse20A
1 MPRXCX 3.10 Mains supply Starter Fuse 35 A
2 MPRXCX 2x1.5 Starter EPC50
3 MPRXCX Separator motor 2.5 - 6.3 A
----lw- .I ... ·"'ia""-o-rm-ot-or---~-6.3 -16 A-"""~I
sepa."..
,...
3 MPRXCX

71 MPRXCX sep;i.rator motor

• 4
4
*",~

72
"
MPRXCX
MPRXCX

Ref. 571356 Rev. 1

577215-02 19
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

1) Cable cannot be longer than 25 meter to avoid voltage drop.


Ref. 571356 Rev. 1

20 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALlATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 2 DRAWINGS

Other equivalent and approved cables may be


used.
Cable areas are calculated with correction
factor 0.7.
Cables used are Shipboard Cables, designed
according to IEC 92-3.
Flame retardant according to IEC 332-3/A.
Halogen-free according to IEC 754-1
Code designations for cables obtainable
through cable producers Helkama, Finland,
and Acatel, France.
Where SSC is indicated it should be a Signal
Shielded Cable with the shield properly

• connected to earth as shown in the electrical


drawings.
For other connections, an armoured cable may
be used provided the armour is connected to
earth, as shown in the electrical drawings, and
gives sufficient EMI protection. Copper wire
armouring is normally used.

577215-02 21
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

2.4.2 Interconnection Diagram, Starter

~.~._._._._._._._._._._._._._.-

Mains suppy
3x230,400, 440, 480, 575 or 690 V AC
Select correct voltage on transformer T8

Separator motor

Space heater 230 VAC


Separator motor
optional
Contactor response, separator
Potential free contacts, max. 250 V 0.5 A
}-+-i8--i =~,"lI_
Jl-2-....,..
!
a
Jl-' -....,.=n'l,...
-'
_

(f)

~
Feed pump motor ~
optional m
::0
J~
Space heater 230 VAC ..... -....,•.t...
!"Ii""O'"
Separator motor )-+-11-+--1 -'~-;...:-'fol;-
,- .. 1"lI
optional
Contactor response, separator
!
Potential free contacts, max. 250 V 0.5 A


Systems emergency stop
(Control voltage off) r--!::JI--{
~

Power supply to EPC 50 (Sheet 5)


230 VAC, 50/60 Hz

ReI. 571072 Rev. 1 Sheet 1

22 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 2 DRAWINGS

2.4.3 Interconnection Diagram, Starter, cont•

• = Replaces jumper in terminals


** = Internal connections

To EPe 50 (sheet 5)
5O}-!-+'-i--lI
...........,
.....
To EPe 50 (sheet 5)
..-.
"-2
.. .
....
}-+-~I---lI-".'

.....
-

• Separator interlock switch


optional

Separator emergency stop


(optional, external)

Sludge valve interlock switch


optional
~ ........""
...2

Remote stop
Feed pump
Remote start

Feed pump interlock


Heater interlock

• Potential free contact, max. 250 V 0.5 A


(Feed pump running = contact closed)
Tripped mo r cir ui bre k r 0 ion I
Potential free Ne contacts, max. 250 V 0.5 A

Emergency Shut Down (ESD) signal (optional)

To EPe 50 (sheet 3)

ReI. 571072 Rev. 1 Sheet 2

577215-02 23
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

2.4.4 Interconnection Diagram, Transmitters

'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'--
a
! <I-
! O-EI
'.
0,"
,"
il~
"~
XS 1
Vibration switch
Optional

rllf~f~'-'-11-'''~i --.{ Jl}--+-+..:+..+-r~~·~3E3 •


Remote OP unit
* Termination
jumper. Only at
sattbus end units. i .• i
iL._._._._._._._.~i ~
Temp. sensor. r'-'-
2J-. :l:E=E' "0-.,.a o
2xPT 100
.....
&-7 !!!.;;.
0:1: oZ
TT 1 (Alarm)
2J-I = I
!
g
a
--l
:IJ
L._._ or-
TT 2 (Control)
~
...... 2J-'
2J-.
2J-'=t!::Hm
e
z
2J-'
.... 2J-I
L._._._._._._._._..J
2J-5
2J-4
--l
m
"U
PT1 rl'4~~ ~ ~l'~I'-II-i'~~--{ )....-+-++..-1--1'"17-1 :::t::t:=f
o
(J1
! -btL 17- 2 !
L._._._._._._._._._.J
17-2 o

PT4
.....:::t::t:=3J
}--+-+..:+..-I--lr'I-'


From Starter (Sheet 2)
'--i--+-:-i-+-I ""'-=~I=::f
..-.-
r
....
52-5

LS
Level Switch
Sludge Tank
(Optional)
:g ,
r'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'-'~

I
i
.
!
i..._._._._._._._._._..i

Ref. 571072 Rev. 1 Sheet 3

24 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 2 DRAWINGS

2.4.5 Interconnection Diagram, Solenoid Valves

<..
-
Vl

08 3..~
x x ~53~
:": •
0 g.~-
0
Signal to alarm panel. "
Pot. free contact, opens at alarm - -,
Max. 50 V AC/OC, 1.0 A I- 22-'
}-.......-+-'-<-1l--l1- 22-2
~

SV6 rw.t-
~
-I 31-'
Solenoid valve for If----{37}--H-+-IH1 -
control of
I 37-2 kn.r
Pneumatic Sludge
1 :......


Pump
(Optional)

o
SV1 ~ "-'11-----{ l--i-+-+---lr- 11-1 -.:....... oZ
Oil feed "n~ll_H I- 11-2 - -I
::0
or
:w::: C
Z
-I
ID: m
-u
o
U1
o
SV10
Water seal ~"-J l4- - jfi:

SV15
~"-'j -
• -
Opening water .!ll:.5..
15-2
N

SV16 i--
Closing water ~'6-' 16-1
16-2 ~
'6-

Ref. 571072 Rev. 1 Sheet 4

577215-02 25
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

2.4.6 Interconnection Diagram, Solenoid Valves cont•

.~

Systems emergency stop .... , --""'''''''~


....,-_.""''5-


(Control voltage off)

::~

15 0
L c... ;::;§
c C Dl :::::l
3
"0
3
~
"'CD
~Q. C-

From starter (shee_t_1.:..)


IIil I ~Io -{ 2 }-;-I--'~_i_lI='-' ---'2......rr::
2-2~

From starter (sheet 2)


50
......,,
.......,
...,
....
...,
....

51-1
51-2
51-"
From starter (sheet 2) ,,-'
51
51-5
"...
51-1
51-8

,'f

Ref. 571072 Rev. 1 Sheet 5

26 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 2 DRAWINGS

2.4.7 Interconnection Diagram, Optional Equipment

:I:
. ~
;;1
. :Il

~~
• Remote alarm indicatioo ,._._._._._._.,
~o
L._._._._._
o
oZ
-i
:D

c:J- ,,-, 11 +ii--{.32' -HH--1["-' ~~§rt'-I'~-~'-~'~-;'-~


High temp. indication i!i c:::::J-
32-1 32-1
o
r
Low temp. indication c=J- ]2-3 Ir! r 32-3 C
I c::::J-]2-4 I 32-4
Pot. free contacts i i Z
Max. 50 VAC/DC, 1.0 A L._._._._._._ ...J -i
Contact closes at alarm. m
-u
Remote operatiOG :'-'-'-'-'-'-':
o
(J1
Remote mode selected
1
i ---33-1
o
(output 24 VAC) i
i ---33-' 33-'+1--4:0061
Sep. status indication 1
(output 24 VAC) i
. 11-i--{33H-+-t-11
~:: ::=U:3:Ill~
Separation Start/Stop


!:>lclll I: ~5 II 33-5
Jumper X71:1 to X71:3 to I Start I

avoid false alarm when not iL- Stop. _ . _ ~


1

used. i
L._._._._._

r'-'-'-'-'-'-"

!i aan::;~ r!i
Data commt lojcatjoo
I .J4-l
34-4
i i
L._._._._. ...J

Ref. 571072 Rev. 1 Sheet 6

577215-02 27
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

2.4.8 Circuit Diagram, Power Circuits

.,,~

Mains supply
------------------~~~======================~~
------------------~
------------------~~ ~ ~

tn ~ ~ r"T-~O
~~Ul.l~~U~l
rn~~t:t:N~=====tti
Separator
@: ::::... c= ~~hl . . . 1<1
~~
,,
"'-i.-
.1: rl-~~."~7----4

- ~_:~


Space heater ~=_r----------------;~~--~
L ~l~
(optional)

( -l"'C ~:...
~1.ol
U2
V2 N
~--$e
.M"
I _
Feed pump
(optional)
- ';---------------~~,
\.~~ri---------------~~:~+_+_~~~:~~<II><t,~~·~,;~7_----4
~- _.
,
Space heater fL : at
(optional) ~==r--------------
L ;£,
~~~~ ~

u
,:; .J,
lD7~~ 3D5
<;I~ ~
~ ~~ -~
S ;->
.J/
~-~g

~ IS 30J
IS
,~I><t '-
,,il< a: J04 ru"
I ~ r<r ~~l
~ "
'l'l
:o~
J06
~
~
~
- '+ ~
O
<I- J

Cant.

Ref. 571073 Rev: 1 Sheet 1

28 577215-02
JJr------------------------------------------------,
~
• • ~
...•• j;
':'!
en
::!. CO '"
'U
C
o
(;j _.
(') :D
'ii
m
f r·-·-·-·-·-·-----·-·---·-·-·-·-·-·-·---·-·-·-·,
i '1.4' N; 24 V N
iX4QN:.24V
I
'"
'40
'21
'00
..
Cl
_.
C

_.
~
JJ
'Q
~;::
I
j '1.6 EMERGENCY STOP 52'
" Dj z
21 22 , '" 109
101
K2
ca (f)

~
I
I START SEPARATOR 52/C 52/A , '02 CONTACTOR, 1/C51~ ; r
i
i
12' '01
SEPARATOR 1/C53'".. ..-T
llCS ?....-or- 3

S
<5
I '1.1 104
fA::-" ._._._.-. " 'T.r"i4 en z
...i " " 3Y"34 'Q
,'" " 107
.~
CD (f)

J
1

'" 'DJ" '08 K2


14
i X-4S..
i '1.1
H2
X2
PILOT LAMP,
SEPARATOR
'/"~
~ ".i'I
Dj
--<
m
;::
:D
i, H7
1/C4 71
(Remote indlcallon) ~
72

.en m
":Dm
.:=.
0
'00 .',--'-"!--!----I----:1,',,'=', !r- - ~
12
- X1<'>X2
J"\.._ SEPARATOR INTERLOCK m
'!':
I
INDICATION z
en Optional ()
..... ! m
..... H8 SLUDGE VAlVE INDICATION Dj
'''.10>.
.
'00
'"en ~;-""-;il"r'=O -1"-
I W- Xr<>'"""'I.2 Optional

AJ
~

i CD
6 I'
SEPARAlOR FEEDBACK
", 110
i H3 PilOT LAMP, FEED
'" 117
'00 i PUMP
Dj
::I
,
~6 FEED PUMP FEEDBACK
"• "'
128 :iJ Xl~l
1~
112 113

44136
i
i X-45 8
'1.1

i...._. ,_,_,_,_,
Xl 108
X2
l:l.

'"
CD
TART FEED PUM
53/C 53/A
,'" " '14
,-",---
1 115 X ,
F.-""-;-,::'-<>:-!-,"-'~""
1<3 CONTACTOR, FEED
PUMP ljC4
J(J
1..-A2
CD
l:l.
21.22
'" '" 7 ..-A4
"c3
1.14 '05 ~
'30 '33 l / C4

" 5'...-A6
"
1 1--~-1J2
l/C4
54 1~
,'" " 106
'18
" "T.---":i<
BJ ~ "
, '" " '19
'/CJ~
7 107
!r', '/CJ~
71 72
'A'
L.J._._._. ___ ._._. _____ ._._._._._._._._._._._. (Remote indication) ~

'"o
~
Z
Gl
(f)

X019249A
2 DRAWINGS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

2.4.10 Circuit Diagram, ESD-relay and Trip Contacts (optional)

r--'-'-'-'-'---'-'-",
ESD relay kit
(optional)
i
.
r--·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-".
Trip contact kit
(optional)

I
I
02T 1
r7 - J-..o-l5i -1
:g!(35)55 56(36) 137
-I 02l 156 Xl
(41}~6(42i - &
03T
_ ............. 151_11
r 55 56 139
~L----,"-O--
03l 159 Xl
__ ..
65 66 140


L._._._._._._._._._.~

Ref. 571073 Rev. 1 Sheet 3

30 577215-02
3 REMOTE SUPERVISION PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

3 Remote Supervision

[NOTE]
It is possible to supervise the Purifier System from
a remote position. It is, however, Dll1 possible to
operate the Purifier System from a remote position.

Connection to steering system via


PROFIBUS or MODBUS fieldbus systems.
PROFIBUS or MODBUS communication
protocol can be used to connect an EPC 50


Control Unit to a central steering system. The
EPC 50 Control Unit uses a PROFIBUS DP or
MODBUS RTU. Every node, or EPC 50 Control
Unit, on the bus has a unique address, and can
use 200 bytes for data exchange. An interface
board is needed to connect an EPC 50 Control
Unit to the respective fieldbus system. This is
mounted on the I/O card.
Remote fieldbus connection for EPC 50 Control
Unit is for use in those cases where the user
wants access to data and operation information
from the control cabinet, and supervision and!
or remote control from his own steering
system.

32 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 3 REMOTE SUPERVISION

577215-02 33
4 SPECIFICATIONS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

4 Specifications
4.1 Cables

Cable Identification
All cables are marked to simplifY identification
and fault finding.

Specifications
The following specifications apply to cables
connected to and from Alfa Laval equipment.
Follow the instructions given in the cable list.
Examples of cable types that can be used:


Steel armoured cable.

Copper armoured cable with a separate earth



core.

• Steel armoured and shielded signal cable;


pair twisted or parallel.


• Shielded signal cable; pair twisted or
parallel.

34 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 4 SPECIFICATIONS

4.2 Cable Routing


Recommendations
Power cables carry the power supply to motors,
heaters, etc.
Any distance between signal and power cables
reduces electrical noise transfer.
Examples of recommended routing of various
cable types.
Power Signal
• Power cables and signal cables routed on a Cables Cable
cable rack should be separated.
t@@\ (@@\
• Sattbus cables should be routed away from
power cables. ~ ~
If the space is limited. cables can be routed in

• tubes.

4.3 Oil, Water, Steam, and Condensate Piping


For piping to and from Alfa Laval equipment,
see the specifications below.

Specifications
• The correct pipe size must be used in the oil
system.
• The number of bends in the oil pipes must
be minimized.

• •


The suction height must be as low as
possible.
The oil feed pump must be a displacement
type pump.
• The pump must be positioned close to the
oil tank.
• The heater must be installed close to the
purifier unit to maintain correct feed oil
temperature.
• The recirculation line should be connected
either directly to the settling tank (HFO) or to
the oil outlet line from the separator (LO).
• The oil outlet line from the separator must be
connected to the system tank for lube oil, or
the service tank for fuel oil.

577215-02 35
4 SPECIFICATIONS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

4.4 Ambient Temperature Limitation


Specification
Leading classification societies state in their
regulations for engine room equipment that the
maximum ambient temperature permissible is
+55 ° C. To meet this regulation, it is essential
that electrical and electronic components have
good ventilation, ant temperature control.

4.5 Sludge Tank


• Sludge tank volume per Purifier System Ventilation pipe
should cover approximately up to 2 days


storage at a discharge interval of 2 hours (for
discharge volumes see technical data).
A manhole should be installed for inspection
and cleaning.
Sludge pipe
connection

• The tank should be fitted with a sounding
pipe.
I,
"
"
Ii
I, Min. height
Sludge outlet I, 400 mm
• The tank floor, or most of it, should have a pump connection
"
I,
slope of minimum 15°. I, o
• The sludge outlet pump connection should be o "'-'

positioned in the lowest part of the tank.


• A high level alarm switch, connected to the
sludge pump, should be installed.
• A heating coil should be used to keep the


High level
sludge warm and fluid while being pumped Manhole
alarm
switch
out.
• Tank ventilation must follow the classification
rules for evacuation of gases.
• There should be a ventilation pipe to fresh air.
• The ventilation pipe should be straight. If this '<:'"--------------
>
.f- _
is not possible, any bends must be gradual. @

• The ventilation pipe must not extend below the


tank top.
• A sludge tank with partition walls must have
ventilation pipes in all compartments, or
cutouts in the upper edge, to allow vapours to
travel through the tank.

36 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 4 SPECIFICATIONS

The number of ventilation pipes, and their


minimum dimension, depend on the size and
number of separators connected to the same
tank. See table below.
Type 1 system 2 systems

PA615 1 x 070 mm 1 x 0100 mm

577215-02 37
4 SPECIFICATIONS PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

4.6 Sludge Piping

Specification
• The sludge pipe from the separator to the
sludge tank should be vertical.
If a vertical pipe is not possible, the deviation (A)
from the vertical line must not exceed 30°.


• The sludge pipe must not extend below the
tank top.

[MOTE]
An extended sludge pipe will obstruct ventilation and
create back pressure that could cause seperator
problems.

,/
-'

38 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 4 SPECIFICATIONS

If more than one separator is connected to the


same sludge tank, a butterfly valve should be
installed in each sludge pipe.

[MO't£J
If a butterfly valve is not used, the bowl and the
operating system may be affected.

• If a butterfly valve is used, it should be


equipped with an interlocking switch
(connected to the separator starter) to prevent
the separator from being started when the
valve is not fully open.

577215-02 39
5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

5 Commissioning and Initial Start·


5.1 Completion Check List
It is essential before starting up the separation
system that all units are in good operating
condition and that all pipelines and control
equipment are properly connected to assure
correct operation.
Use this check list as a guide for completing the
system installation:

Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency Is In agreement with
the machine plate. If incorrect, resulting overspeed
may cause breakdown.

1 Check that transport seals are removed from
all pipes.
2 Use flushing filters to prevent pipe work debris
from being pumped into the separation
system.

("OorE]
The flushing filters must be removed after Initial
flushing.

4
Check that all separators are in proper
working condition. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Make sure that separators are lubricated in

accordance with instructions.

( ..oorE]
Make sure that the spindle bearings are prelubrlcated

Drop some frame oil onto the bearings

5 Separators are delivered without oil in the oil


sump. For information on oil filling and oil type,
see the Separator Manual booklet.

40 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START

[MO'fEJ
Too much, or too little oil may result in damage the
separator bearings.
Neglecting an oil changa may result in damage to
separator bearings.

6 Power on.
7 Check that the separator rotation direction
corresponds with the arrow on the frame by
doing a quick start/stop (1-2 seconds.) and
looking at the motor fan rotation.

• 8
If power cables have been installed incorrectly, the
separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating
parts can unscrew.

Check the pump function and direction .

577215-02 41
5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

5.2 Initial Start-up


Use this check list for initial system start up:
1 Check that there is oil in the feed oil tank.
2 Check water and air supply. See "System
Data" on page 6.

3 Check power supplies to the control unit and


that the voltage is in accordance with data in
"System Data" on page 6..
4 Check all parameter settings in the control
unit. See Installation Parameters in the
Parameter List booklet.

(NOTE]
The Control Unit Is supplied with standard
conflguretion parameters. You may have to make
some changes to suit your Installation.

5 Start the separation system as described in
the Operating Instructions booklet.
6 Start up step by step, checking that the
machine and units function properly.
7 Establish system pressures.
The delivery height pressure is the pressure in
the oil pipe work down stream from the
separation system, due to the pipe bends and
the height (head) to the cleaned oil tank. If the
cleaned oil tank is below the separation
system the delivery height pressure may be
very low. The oil paring disc pressure will have
to be greater than the delivery height pressure
for any oil to flow.
Proceed as follows:

• Ensure the valves in the oil system are in the
correct positions.
• The oil should be at separation temperature.
Cont.

42 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START

• Ensure that V5 is closed.


• Fully open the back pressure regulating valve
RV4.
• The shut off valve V4 should be open.
• Open SV15 for 3 seconds to prime the
operating slide.
• Open SV16 for 15 seconds to close the bowl.
• Open SV10 for 30 seconds to put water into
the bowl.
• Feed oil to the separator at the normal flow
rate by opening SV1.
• Note the pressure in the oil outlet PT4, both on
the pressure gauge and in the EPC50 display.
This pressure is P min.
• Gradually close the back pressure regulating
valve RV4. The pressure on PT4 will increase.

• The water pressure (PT5) decreases slightly


as the paring tube moves inwards. The water
pressure will suddenly drop when oil passes
from the oil paring chamber to the water
paring chamber. Note the pressure of PT4
both on the pressure gauge and in the EPC50
display. This pressure is P max.
• Open RV4.
• Stop the oil feed to the separator and note the
pressure in the oil outlet. This is the delivery
height pressure P del.
• Stop the heater.
• Stop the separator.
• Stop the feed pump when the heater has
cooled .

577215-02 43
5 COMMISSIONING AND INITIAL START PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

5.2.1 Calculating Operating Pressure


• Calculate the normal back pressure level
during operation as follows:

P min + P max
----- = Pnormal
2

• Calculate the value for low pressure alarm


setting (Pr 11) as follows:

P min + P normal
---
2 -- = PIOW press
.

• Calculate the value for high pressure alarm


(Pr 10) as follows:

P nonnal
----- =
2
+ P max
P high press.

Adjust the back pressure to P nonnal



Set Pr 11 to give alarm at pressure decreasing
below the Plow press. value.
Set Pr 10 to give alarm at pressure increasing
above the P high press. value.

44 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE

6 Shut-down and Storage


Storage before Installation
If the separation system is stored before
installation, the following safeguards must be
taken:

• x Separator manual

6.1 Shut-down after Use


If the separation system is going to be shut down
for a period of time, the following safeguards
must be taken:

577215-02 45
6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE

6.2 Protection and Storage


All system equipinent, both the separator and
the ancillary equipment, must be stored indoors
at 5 - 55°C, if not delivered in water-resistant
box for outdoor storage.
If there is a risk for condensation of water, the
equipment must be protected by ventilation and
heating above dew point.
The following protection products are
recommended:
• Anti-rust oil with long lasting effective
treatment for external surfaces. The oil should
prevent corrosion attacks and give a waxy


surface.
• Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) thin and
lubricating for inside protection. It gives a
lubricating transparent oil film.
• Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-
rust oil after the shut-down.

• If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the


equipment must be inspected every 6 months
and, if necessary, the protection be renewed.

Rubber Parts
• Gaskets, O-rings and other rubber parts
should not be stored for more than two years.
After this time, they should be replaced.

Separator
Dismantle the separator bowl and take out the

O-rings. Clean the bowl with oil and reassemble
without the O-rings. Place in a plastic bag with
silica dessicant bags and seal the plastic bag.
Grease the spindle.

46 577215-02
PA 615 PURIFIER SYSTEM INSTALLATION SYSTEM REFERENCE 6 SHUT-DOWN AND STORAGE

Valves, Pipes and Similar Equipment


• Components like valves need to be cleaned
with solvent and treated with anti-rust oil (type
112).

• Water pipes should be drained and treated


with anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Articles made of rubber or plastics (e.g. seals)
must not be treated with anti-rust oil.

6.3 Reassembly and


Start up
• Clean away the anti-rust oil with white spirit.

• •

Remove the silica gel bags from all units.
Follow all relevant instructions in the Separator
Manual and Operating Instructions.

577215-02 47
'-.~CF~/
--L~~I----------------.

Separator Manual
High Speed Separator
P615

Product No. 881100-04-0210


Book No. 577461-02 Rev. 3

Published By:
Alia Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba. Sweden

Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telelax: +46853031040

© Alia Laval Tumba AB 15 March 2007


This publication or any part there 01 may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission 01
Alia Laval Tumba AB.

2

Read and understand instruction manuals
and observe the warnings before installation,
operation, service and maintenance.

Not following the instructions can result in


serious accidents.

• In order to make the information clear only foreseeable conditions


have been considered. No warnings are given, therefore, for
situations arising from the unintended usage of the machine and its
tools.

3
Contents

1 Safety Instructions 7
1.1 Warning signs in text 12
1.2 Environmental issues 13
1.3 Requirements of personnel............ .. 14

2 Read this first & Separator Basics 15


2.1 Read This First.. 16
2.2 Design and function 18
2.3 Definitions 26

3 Service Instructions 27


3.1 Periodic maintenance...... .. 28
3.2 Maintenance Logs 31
3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 36
3.4 Check points at Major Service 48
3.5 3·year service.................................... .. 51
3.6 Lifting instructions 52
3.7 Cleaning 53
3.8 Oil change 56
3.9 Vibration 58
3.10 General directions 60

4 Dismantling/Assembly 65
4.1 Inletloutlet and bowL 68
4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 86
4.3 Friction coupling 100
4.4 Flat belt and tightener 107

• 4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Oil filling device
Water tank
Brake
Frame feet
112
113
113
115

5 Technical Reference 117


5.1 Product description 118
5.2 Technical data 119
5.3 Connection list 120
5.4 Basic size drawing 122
5.5 Interface description : 124
5.6 Water quality 132
5.7 Lubricants 133
5.8 Drawings 143
5.9 Storage and installation 157

577461-02
5.10 Protection and storage of goods 158

6 Operating 167
6.1 Operating routine ... .................•........................... 168
6.2 Before first Start 168
6.3 Start after a service 170
6.4 After Safety Stop 177

577461-02
1 Safety Instructions

The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at high


speed. This means that:

• Kinetic energy is high


• Great forces are generated
• Stopping time is long


Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.
Rotating parts are carefully balanced to reduce
undesired vibrations that can cause a breakdown.
Material properties have been considered
carefully during design to withstand stress and
fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a
specific separation duty (type of liquid, rotational
speed, temperature, density etc.) and must not be
used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result in
unbalance due to build-up of sediment, reduction
of material strength, etc., that subsequently could
lead to serious damage and/or injury.
The following basic safety instructions therefore
apply:

• •


Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.

Strictly follow the instructions for


installation, operation and maintenance.
• Ensure that personnel are competent and
have sufficient knowledge of maintenance
and operation, especially concerning
emergency stopping procedures.
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts
and the special tools supplied.
1 Safety Instructions

Disintegration hazards

• When power cables are connected.


always check direction of motor rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could
unscrew.

• If excessive vibration occurs, stop


separator and keep bowl filled with
liquid during rundown.

• Use the separator only for the purpose


and parameter range specified by
Alfa Lava!. ····
D ..

• Check that the gear ratio is correct for


power frequency used. If incorrect,
subsequent overspeed may result in a
serious break down.

• Welding or heating of parts that rotate


can seriously affect material strength.

• Wear on the large lock ring thread must

fI
not exceed safety limit. q>.mark on lock
ring must not pass opposite q>.mark by
more than specified distance.

• Inspect regularly for corrosion and


erosion damage. Inspect frequently if
process liquid is corrosive or erosive.

11
1 Safety Instructions

Entrapment hazards

• Make sure that rotating parts have come


to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.

• To avoid accidental start, switch off and


lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.

Assemble the machine completely


before start. All covers and guards must
be in place.

Electrical hazard
Lh
• Follow local regulations for electrical
installation and earthing (grounding).

• To avoid accidental start, switch off and


lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.

• Lh
Crush hazards

• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting


instructions.

Do not work under a hanging load.


1 Safety Instructions

Noise hazards

• Use ear protection in noisy


environments.

Burn hazards

• Lubrication oil and various machine


surfaces can be hot and cause burns.

Skin irritation hazards

• When using chemical cleaning agents,


make sure you follow the general rules


and suppliers recommendation
regarding ventilation, personnel
protection etc.
• Use of lubricants in various situations.

10
1 Safety Instructions

Cut hazards

• Sharp edges on bowl discs and threads


can cause cuts.

Flying objects

• • Risk for accidental release of snap rings


and springs when dismantling and
assembly.

Health hazard

• Risk for unhealthy dust when handling


friction blocks/pads. Use a dust mask to
make sure not to inhale any dust.


1 Safety Instructions

Warning signs in text


Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three grades
of warning signs used in the text where there is a
risk for injury to personnel.

DANGER indicates an imminently


hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.


CAUTION indicates a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury.

[MOTE]
NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result
in property damage.
1 Safety Instructions

1.2 Environmental issues

Unpacking
Packing material consists of wood, plastics,
cardboard boxes and in some cases metal straps.
Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused,
recycled or used for energy recovery.
Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant.


Metal straps should be sent for material recycling .

Maintenance
During maintenance oil and wear parts in the
machine are replaced.
Oil must be taken care of in agreement with local
regulations.
Rubber and plastics should be burnt at a licensed
waste incineration plant. If not available they
should be disposed to a suitable licensed land fill
site.
Bearings and other metal parts should be sent to
a licensed handler for material recycling.


Seal rings and friction linings should be disposed
to a licensed land fill site. Check your local
regulations.

Worn out or defected electronic parts should be


sent to a licensed handler for material recycling.

13
1 Safety Instructions

Requirements of
personnel
Only skilled or instructed persons are allowed to
operate the machine, e.g. operating and
maintenance staff.
Skilled person: A person with technical
knowledge or sufficient experience to enable
him or her to perceive risks and to avoid
hazards which electricity/mechanics can
create.
Instructed person: A person adequately
advised or supervised by a skilled person to
enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics
can create.

In some cases special skilled personnel may
need to be hired, like electricians and others. In
some of these cases the personnel has to be
certified according to local regulations with
experience of similar types of work.

14
2 Read this first & Separator Basics

Contents

2.1 Read This First 16

2.2 Design and function 18


2.2.1 Application 18
2.2.2 Design 19

• 2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
Outline of function
Separating function
Sludge discharge function
Power transmission
19
20
22
24
2.2.7 Sensors and indicators 25

2.3 Definitions 26

15
2. 1 Read This First 2 Read this first & Separator Basics

2.1 Read This First


This manual is designed for operators,
maintenance personnel and service
engineers working with the Alfa Laval
P 615 separator.

If the separator has been delivered and


installed by Alfa Laval as a part ofa
processing system, this manual should be
viewed as part ofthe System
Documentation. Study carefully all
instructions in any System Documentation.


In addition to this Separator Manual a
Spare Parts Catalogue, SPC is supplied.

The Separator Manual consists of

Safety Instructions
Pay special attention to the safety instructions
for the separator. Accidents causing damage to
equipment and/or serious injury to persons or
personnel can result if the safety instructions
are not followed.

Basic Principles of Separation


This chapter describes the purpose of
separation and separation principles.

Design and function


This chapter contains a description of the

separator.

Operating Instructions
This chapter contains operating instructions
for the separator only.

16
2 Read this first & Separator Basics 2. 1 Read This First

Service, Dismantling, Assembly


This chapter gives instructions for the
maintenance procedures. It also contains step-
by-step instructions for dismantling and
assembly of the separator for service and
repair.

Fault Finding
Refer to this chapter if the separator functions
abnormally.
If the separator has been installed as a part of a
processing system, always refer to the trouble-
tracing instructions, in the System

• Documentation.

Technical Reference
This chapter contains technical data
concerning the separator and drawings.

Installation
This chapter contains specifications and
recommendations concerning separator
installation.

[MOTE]
• A complete reading of this manual by personnel in
contact with the machine is essential to safety.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate
or maintain the separator until they have read and
fUlly understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the machine and the work to be carried
out.

17
2.2 Design and function 2 Read this first & Separator Basics

2.2 Design and function

2.2.1 Application

The P 615 is a high-speed centrifugal separator


intended for marine and land applications. It is
specifically designed for cleaning of mineral oils
from water and solid particles (sludge). The
cleaned oil is discharged continuously, while the
sludge is discharged at intervals.
The separator handles the following types of
lubricating oils and low viscosity fuel oils:


• Distillate, viscosity 1,5 - 5,5 cSt/40 QC
• Marine diesel oil, viscosity 13 cSt/40 QC
• Intermediate fuel oil and heavy fuel oil
(viscosity 30-380 eSt/50 QC)

• Lubricating oil of R & 0 type, detergent or


steam turbine.

The separator can be operated either as a


purifier or as a clarifier. When operated as a
purifier the separator discharges the separated The P 615 separator.
water continuously.
When the oil contains only small amounts of
water the separator is operated as a clarifier,
discharging the water together with the solid
particles.
The separator has to be installed together with
devices for control of its operation.

Disintegration hazards
Use the separator only for the purpose and
parameters (type of liqUid, rotational speed,
temperature, density etc.) specified in chapter
5 Technical Reference, page 117 and in the Purchase
Order documents.

Consult your Alia Laval representative before any


changes outside these parameters are made.

18
2 Read this first & Separator Basics 2.2 Design and function

2.2.2 Design
The P 615 separator comprises a frame
consisting of the frame lower part, the
-+Y1~_220
intermediate part and the frame top part with a
frame hood.
The separator bowl (C) is driven by an electric
motor (A) via a flat-belt power transmission (D)
and bowl spindle (B). The motor drive is
equipped with a friction coupling to prevent
overload. --A
The bowl is of disc type and hydraulically
operated at sludge discharges. The hollow bowl
spindle (B) features an impeller which pumps

• ~-I
closing water from a built-in tank to the
operating system for sludge discharge. I--'--+~
E l D F
The main inlets and outlets are shown with their 377 t
373
connection numbers in the illustration. The
connections are listed in chapter 5 Technical Sectional view
Reference, page 117, where also the basic size Main parts, inlets and outlets
drawing can be found.
A Electric motor
B Bowl spindle
C Bowl
2.2.3 Outline of function o Flat belt
E Closing water tank
F Brake handle
The separation process takes place in the
rotating bowl. Unseparated oil is fed into the 201 Oil inlet
bowl through the inlet (201). The oil is cleaned in 220 Oil outlet
221, 222 Water/sludge outlet
the bowl and leaves the separator through the 372 Opening water inlet
outlet (220) via a paring chamber. 373 Bowl closing water
377 Overflow

• Impurities heavier than the oil are collected in


the sludge space at the bowl periphery and
removed automatically at regular intervals.
Permissible pressures and operating conditions
462
463
Drain
Drain

are specified in chapter 5 Technical Reference,


page 117.
The processing parts ofthe separator are shown
in the illustration on next page.
There are no contacting surfaces between
process rotating parts (the bowl) and stationary
parts (inlet, outlet, feed devices), and the
interfacing surfaces are not sealed. As the
separation process is carefully balanced
regarding pressures and fluid levels, any
leakages will not occur as long as the correct
running conditions are maintained.

19
2.2 Design and function 2 Read this first & Separator Basics

2.2.4 Separating function

Liquid flow
206
Separation takes place in the separator bowl to I
which unseparated oil is fed through the inlet
pipe (201). The oil is led by the distributor (T)
towards the periphery of the bowl.
When the unseparated oil reaches the slots of
the distributor, it will rise through the channels
formed by the disc stack (G) where it is evenly
distributed into the disc stack.
The oil is continuously separated from water and
sludge as it will flow towards the center of the


bowl. When the cleaned oil leaves the disc stack
it rises upwards and enters the paring chamber.
S
From there it is pumped by the paring disc (F)
and leaves the bowl through the outlet (220). L

Separated sludge and water move towards the


bowl periphery. In purification separated water R
rises along the outside of the disc stack, passes
from the top disc channels over the edge of the
gravity disc (K) and leaves the bowl into the
common sludge and water outlet (221) of the
separator.
Heavier impurities are collected in the sludge B
space (H) outside the disc stack and are
discharged at intervals through the sludge ports
(L).

F
G
Paring disc
Disc stack
201 Oil inlet
206 Water seal and

H Sludga space displacement water
I Top disc inlet
K Gravity disc
L Sludge ports 220 Oil outlet
R Bowl body 221 Water outlet
S Bowl hood 372 Opening water inlet
T Distributor 373 Bowi closing water
U Paring chamber cover 377 Overflow

20
2 Read this first & Separator Basics 2.2 Design and function

Water seal in purification


To prevent the oil from passing the outer edge of
the top disc (I) and escaping through the water
outlet (221), a water seal must be provided in the
bowl. This is done by filling the bowl with water
through the water inlet (206), before
unseparated oil is supplied. When oil feed is
turned on the oil will force the water towards the
bowl periphery and an interface (X) is formed
between the water and the oil. The position of
the interface is determined by the size of gravity
disc (K).

• Displacement of oil
To avoid oil losses at sludge discharge,
displacement water is fed to the bowl.
Prior to a discharge the oil feed is stopped and
x y
Principle of liquid seal and
displacement water in purification
displacement water added through the water
inl.et (206). This water changes the balance in H Sludge space
the bowl and the interface (X) moves inwards to i Top disc
K Gravity disc
a new position 00, increasing the water volume X Normal interface position
in the sludge space. When the sludge discharge Y Interface position just before
discharge
takes place sludge and water alone are
discharged.
206 Water iniet
Sludge discharge occurs while the displacement 221 Water outlet
water is still flowing. A new water seal will
therefore establish immediately afterwards. The


oil feed is then turned on again.

Gravity disc
In the purification mode, the position of the
interface (X) can be adjusted by replacing the
gravity disc (K) for one of a larger or smaller size.
A gravity disc of a larger size will move the
interface towards the bowl periphery, whereas a
disc of a smaller size will place it closer to the
bowl centre.
The correct gravity disc is selected from a
nomogram, see 5.8.2 Gravity disc nomogram,
page 144.
The sizes of the gravity discs are normally
stamped on the discs.

21
2.2 Design and function 2 Read this first & Separator Basics

Clarifier disc
In the clarification mode, the gravity disc is
replaced by a clarifier disc which seals off the
water outlet. In this case no water seal is
required and consequently there is no oil/water
interface in the bowl. The clarifier disc is an
optional disc with a hole diameter of 40 mm.
This disc is not shown in the nomograms.

2.2.5 Sludge discharge function

Sludge is discharged through a number of ports


CL) in the bowl wall. Between discharges these


ports are covered by the sliding bowl bottom CM),
m
which forms an internal bottom in the
separating space of the bowl. The sliding bowl L

bottom is pressed upwards against a sealing ring M


Cm) by force ofthe closing water underneath. R
N
The sliding bowl bottom is operated
5---0
hydraulically by means of operating water
~-p
supplied to the discharge mechanism from an
external freshwater line. Opening water is
supplied directly to the operating system in the
bowl while closing water is supplied to the built- Sludge discharge mechanism
in closing water tank, and pumped to the L Sludge ports
M Sliding bowi bottom
operating system through the bowl spindle. m Sealing ring
N Upper distributing ring
The opening and closing only takes a fraction of o Operating slide
a second, therefore the discharge volume is P Lower distributing ring
R Bowi body


limited to a certain percentage ofthe bowl
volume. This action is achieved by the closing
water filling space above the upper distributor
ring and pushing the sliding bowl bottom
upwards. Simultaneously, the water in the
chamber below the operating slide is drained off
through the nozzles in the bowl body.

22
2 Read this first & Separator Basics 2.2 Design and function

Bowl opening
The key event to start a sludge discharge is the
downward movement of the operating slide. This
is accomplished by supply of opening water (372)
to the discharge mechanism. Water is drained off
through nozzles (Y) in the bowl body. The sliding
bowl bottom is rapidly pressed downwards by
the force from the liquid in the bowl, opening the
sludge ports.

Bowl closing
After the sludge is discharged the sliding bowl
1

bottom is immediately pressed up and the sludge
ports in the bowl wall are closed.

1
B

Supply of opening water and closing water

372 Opening water

B Closing and make-up water through


bowl spindle
Y Nozzles


23
2.2 Design and function 2 Read this first & Separator Basics

2.2.6 Power transmission

Bowl spindle
In addition to its primary role in the power
transmission system, the bowl spindle also
serves as:
• pump for the closing water -1-----,:;-- B
• supply pipe for the closing water
• lubricator for spindle ball bearings.
Closing water is pumped through the hollow
spindle (B) to the discharge mechanism in the
bowl. For this purpose a pump sleeve (b4) is
fitted in the lower end.
The two spindle bearings are lubricated with oil
mist. An oil pump (b3) creates the oil mist, which
is sucked through the upper ball bearing by a fan
(bl). Oil is supplied via an oil filling device,
+ - - - - b4

~~l-_~~i~
Bowl spindle assembly

B Bowl spindle

which also serves as a level indicator. b1 Fan
b2 Rubber buffers
b3 011 pump
Two identical ring-shaped rubber buffers (b2) b4 Sleeve
support the top bearing housing. The buffers are
held in place by a buffer holder and form
channels through which the recirculated oil
passes.

Belt drive


The bowl spindle is driven by a flat belt.
Adaptation to 50 or 60 Hz power supply is made
by selecting the motor belt pulley with the
appropriate diameter. A longer belt is needed for
the pulley for 50 Hz.
Belt drive
Correct tension is set by means of a spring-
loaded belt tightener.

24
2 Read this first & Separator Basics 2.2 Design and function

Friction coupling
The friction coupling on the motor pulley ensures
gentle start-up and prevents overload of the
electric motor. Centrifugal force creates a torque
that acts on the pulley through the friction
elements.

Friction coupling

2.2.7 Sensors and indicators

Sight glass
• The sight glass shows the oil level in the oil
sump.

Vibration switch (option)


The vibration switch, properly adjusted, trips on
a relative increase in vibration.
• The vibration switch is sensitive to vibration in a
direction perpendicular to its base. It contains a
vibration detecting mechanism that actuates a
snap-action switch when the selected level of
vibration is exceeded. After the switch has
tripped it must be reset manually by pressing
the button on the switch.
Reset push button on vibration switch

25
2.3 Definitions 2 Read this first & Separator Basics

2.3 Definitions


Water seal Water in the solids space of the separator bowl to prevent
the light phase (oil) from leaving the bowl through the heavy
phase (water) outlet, in purifier mode.

26
SEPARATOR MANUAL 3 SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS

3 Service Instructions
Contents
3.8 Oil change 56
3.1 Periodic maintenance 28
3.8.1 Oil change procedure 56
3.1.1 Introduction 28
3.1.2 Maintenance intervals 28
3.9 Vibration 58
3.1.3 Maintenance procedure 30
3.9.1 Vibration analysis 58
3.1.4 Service kits 30
3.9.2 Vibration switch (optional) 59

3.2 Maintenance Logs 31


3.10 General directions 60
3.2.1 Daily checks 31

• 3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
Oil change - monthly
IS - Intermediate Service
MS - Major Service
31
32
34
3.10.1 Ball and roller bearings
3.10.2 Before shut-downs
60
63

3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service


36
3.3.1 Corrosion 36
'.
3.3.2 Erosion 38
3.3.3 Cracks 39
3.3.4 Discharge mechanism 40
3.3.5 Bowl hood and sliding bowl bottom 41
3.3.6 Spindle top cone and bowl body
nave 43
3.3.7 Threads of inlet pipe, paring disc 43

• 3.3.8 Threads on bowl hood and bowl


body
3.3.9 Priming of bowl parts
3.3.10 Disc stack pressure
44
46
47

3.4 Check points at Major Service 48


3.4.1 Paring disc height adjustment 48
3.4.2 Radial wobble of bowl spindle 50

3.5 3-year service 51

3.6 Lifting instructions 52

3.7 Cleaning 53
3.7.1 Cleaning agents 54
3.7.2 Cleaning of bowl discs 55

577461-02 27
3. 1 Periodic maintenance 3 Service Instructions

3.1 Periodic maintenance

3.1.1 Introduction
Periodic, preventive maintenance reduces the
risk of unexpected stoppages and breakdowns.
Maintenance logs are shown on the following
pages in order to facilitate periodic
maintenance.


Disintegration hazards
separator parts that are worn beyond their safe
limits or incorrectly assembled may cause severe
damage or fatal injury.

3.1.2 Maintenance intervals


The following directions for periodic
maintenance give a brief description of which
parts to clean, check and renew at different
maintenance intervals.
The service logs for each maintenance interval
later in this chapter give detailed enumeration
of the checks that must be done.
Daily checks consist of simple check points to


carry out for detecting abnormal operating
conditions.

Oil change interval is 1500 hours. If the total


number of operating hours is less than 1500
hours change oil at least once every year.
Time of operation between oil changes can be
extended from the normal 1500 hours to 2000
hours if a synthetic oil of group D is used.
In seasonal operation change the oil before a
new period.

IS - Intermediate Service consists of an


overhaul of the separator bowl, inlet and outlet
every 3 months or 2000 operating hours. Seals
in bowl and gaskets in the inlet/outlet device
and operating device are renewed.

28
3 SeNice Instructions 3. 1 Periodic maintenance

MS - Major Service consists of an overhaul of


the complete separator every 12 months or
8000 operating hours. An Intermediate Service
is performed, and the flat belt, friction
elements, seals and bearings in the bottom part
are renewed.
3-year service consists of service of the
coupling bearings, service of frame
intermediate part and renewal of frame feet.
The rubber feet get harder with increased use
and age.

Service schedule

• Oi/change ~
Intermediate Service = IS
Major Service = MS
3-year Service

MS MS MS MS
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ IS IS $ $

~""""""""""""""""""""""""'"
,AfM AfiiIWf.·
• ':~.':.'.'.-.'
\:tt::'" p'::::,' . _ , ' ,
, ,,-,,~ ,;,'.'

Installation 1st year 2nd year 3-year


service

Other
Check and prelubricate spindle bearings of

• separators which have been out of service for 6


months or longer. See also 3.10.2 Before shut-
downs, page 63.

Do not interchange bowl parts!


To prevent mixing of parts, e.g. in an Installation
comprising several machines of the same type, the
major bowl parts carry the machine manufacturing
number or its last three digits.

29
3. 1 Periodic maintenance 3 SeNice Instructions

3.1.3 Maintenance procedure


At each intermediate and major service, take a
copy of the service log and use it for notations
during the service.
An intermediate and major service should be
carried out in the following manner:
1 Dismantle the parts as mentioned in the
service log and described in chapter
4 Dismantling/Assembly. page 65.
Place the separator parts on clean. soft
surfaces such as pallets.
2 Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
parts according to the service log.
3 Fit all the parts delivered in the service kit
while assembling the separator as described
in chapter 4 Dismantling/Assembly. page 65.
The assembly instructions have references

to check points which should be carried out
during the assembly.

3.1.4 Service kits

Special service kits are available for


Intermediate Service (IS), Major Service (MS)
and 3 years service kit (3-YSK).
For other services the spare parts have to be
ordered separately.
Note that the parts for IS are not included in the
MS kit.
The contents of the service kits are described in
the Spare Parts Catalogue.
Spare parts kits are available for
Intermediate Service. Major Service and
3-year Service. •
[MO'f£J
Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as otherwise the
warranty will become invalid.
Alia Laval takes no responsibility for the safe
operation of the equipment if non-genuine spare
parts are used.

30
3 Service Instructions 3.2 Maintenance Logs

3.2 Maintenance Logs

3.2.1 Daily checks


The following steps should be carried out daily.
Main component and activity Part Page Notes
Inlet and outlet
Cheddor leakage Connecting housing
Separator bowl
~:--~..,...
Check for vibration and noise
Belt transmission


Check for vibration and noise
~"<;*,.,

Oil sump
Check
Electrical motor

3.2.2 Oil change· monthly


The oil change and check of belt transmission
should be carried out every 1500 hours of
operation.
When using a group D oil, time of operation

• between oil changes can be extended from the


normal 1500 hours to 2000 hours.
When the separator is run for short periods, the
lubricating oil must be changed every 12
months even if the total number of operating
hours is less than 1500 hours (less than 2000
hours if a group D oil is used).
See chapter 5.7 Lubricants, page 133 for
further information on oil brands etc.

Main component all~ .actiy!ty Part Page Notes


Bowl spindle and transmission
~~"i~ "-_.,,,,
Check
Change

31
3.2 Maintenance Logs 3 Service Instructions

3.2.3 IS· Intermediate Service


Name of plant: Local identification:
Separator: P615 Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No.: 881100-04-02/0
Date: Signature:

Renew all parts included in the Intermediate Service kit (IS) and do the following activities.

Main component and activity


'ItL
. ~lk"l:hll .lef'\l;limeJfIliiB!l:··..
'c._:.2~~
Clean and inspect
Ft.
..JliWi%d:1OO)1h_I?J:

32
3 Service Instructions 3.2 Maintenance Logs

33
3.2 Maintenance Logs 3 Service Instructions

3.2.4 MS· Major Service

Name of plant: Local identification:


Separator: P615 Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No.: 881100-04-02/0
Date: Signature:

Renew all parts included in the Intermediate and Major Service kits and do the following
activities.

Part Page Notes


f .x
=
Threads of inlet pipe 43 "'
&8 %% §@888 h
% Paring disc
Housings and frame hood

Clean and inspect Bowl hood 44


;fop disc 55
Bowl discs 55
Distributor
k.!i,.__ lliilli"< 7b ID t : UP;' m n "it m.m!.f:!!! 18C -MS,
Nozzles in bowl body 40
" Sliding bowl bottom 41
Discharge mechanism 40
f!I;r""'"'!9!!''''Th:;:;:''r'''e'':'ad'7s''''on~t:'bow~l:-c.:h~ood",?";'''''a'Zn''ld-''i,.-""",·-%I~"'~
_ _'!!!~
body

bowl 44
F =
Bowl spindle cone and bowl
body nave 43
~~UI1i· ·.:s!ghT{jtpa!1hidi~ 1__='=1'=8 BIL
Disc stack pressure
.. G:lilingof '1lkfe"Su1taceli"';(
Corrosion, erosion, cracks

34
--,

3 Service Instructions 3.2 Maintenance Logs

1) See manufacturer's instructions.

35
3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 3 Service Instructions

3.3 Check points at


Intermediate Service

3.3.1 Corrosion

Evidence of corrosion attacks should be looked


for and rectified each time the separator is
dismantled. Main bowl parts such as the bowl
body and hood must be inspected with particular
care for corrosion damage.

Disintegration hazard
Inspect regularly for corrosion damage. Inspect
frequently If the process liquid is corrosive.
Main bowl parts to check for corrosion

Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if
you suspect that the largest depth of a corrosion
damage exceeds 1,0 mm or if cracks have been
found. Do not continue to use the separator until
it has been inspected and given clearance for
operation by Alfa Lava!'
Cracks or damage forming a line should be
considered as being particularly hazardous.

Non-stainless steel and cast iron parts


Corrosion (rusting) can occur on unprotected
surfaces of non-stainless steel and cast iron.

Frame parts can corrode when exposed to an
aggressive environment.

36
3 Service Instructions 3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service

Stainless steel

Stainless steel parts corrode when in contact


with either chlorides or acidic solutions. Acidic
solutions cause a general corrosion. The chloride
corrosion is characterised by local damage such
as pitting, grooves or cracks. The risk of chloride
corrosion is higher if the surface is
• exposed to a stationary solution, Example of chloride corrosion in
stainless steel.
• in a crevice,
• covered by deposits,
• exposed to a solution that has a low pH value.

• A corrosion damage caused by chlorides on


stainless steel begins as small dark spots that
can be difficult to detect.
• Inspect closely for all types of damage by
corrosion and record these observations
carefully.
• Polish dark-coloured spots and other Polish corrosion marks to prevent
further damage.
corrosion marks with a fine grain emery cloth.
This may prevent further damage.

• Disintegration hazard
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate cracks
beneath the surface.

All forms of cracks are a potential danger and are


totally unacceptable.

Replace the part if corrosion can be suspected of


affecting its strength or function.

Other metal parts


Separator parts made of materials other than
steel, such as brass or other copper alloys, can
also be damaged by corrosion when exposed to
an aggressive environment. Possible corrosion
damage can be in the form of pits and/or cracks.

37
3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 3 Service Instructions

3.3.2 Erosion
Erosion can occur when particles suspended in
the process liquid slide along or strike against a
surface. Erosion can become intensified locally
by flows of higher velocity.

Disintegration hazard
Inspect regularly tor erosion damage. Inspect
frequently if the process liquid is erosive.


Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if Max. 1 mm
the largest depth of any erosion damage exceeds
1,0 =. Valuable information as to the nature of
the damage can be recorded using photographs,
plaster impressions or ha=ered-in lead.
Erosion is characterised by: Maximum permitted erosion.
• Burnished traces in the material.
• Dents and pits having a granular and shiny
surface.

Parts of the bowl particularly subjected to


erosion are:
• The paring disc.
• The top disc.


The underside of the distributor in the vicinity
of the distribution holes and wings.

The sludge ports.



Look carefully for any signs of erosion damage.
Erosion damage can deepen rapidly and
consequently weaken parts by reducing the
thickness of the metal.

38
3 Service Instructions 3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service

3.3.3 Cracks
Cracks can initiate on the machine after a
period of operation and propagate with time.
• Cracks often initiate in areas exposed to high
cyclic material stresses. These cracks are
called fatigue cracks.

• Cracks can also initiate due to corrosion in


an aggressive environment.

• Although very unlikely, cracks may also


occur due to the low temperature
embrittlement of certain materials.

The combination of an aggressive environment

• and cyclic stresses will speed-up the formation


of cracks. Keeping the machine and its parts
clean and free from deposits will help to
prevent corrosion attacks.

Disintegration hazard
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability of
components.

Always replace a part if cracks are present

It is particularly important to inspect for cracks

• in rotating parts.
Always contact your Alfa Lava! representative
if you suspect that the largest depth of the
damage exceeds 1,0 mm. Do not continue to use
the separator until it has been inspected and
cleared for operation by Alfa Lava!.

39
3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 3 Service Instructions

3.3.4 Discharge mechanism

Dirt and lime deposits in the sludge discharge


mechanism can cause discharge malfunction or
no discharge.
• Thoroughly clean and inspect the parts. Pay
special attention to important surfaces (1, 2, 3
and 4). If necessary. polish with steel wool.
• Clean nozzles (5) using soft iron wire or
similar. Note that lime deposits can with
advantage be dissolved in a 10% acetic acid
solution.
3 ....
Use Loctite 242 on the threads if the nozzles
have been removed or replaced.
~=;~."'~.
#4

40
3 Service Instructions 3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service

3.3.5 Bowl hood and sliding bowl


bottom

Poor sealing between the bowl hood seal ring and


the edge of the sliding bowl bottom will cause a
leakage of process liquid from the bowl.

• A Sealing surface in the bowl between bowl


hood and sliding bowl bottom.

Fit a new bowl hood seal ring at each


Intermediate Service (IS) if the old ring is
damaged or indented more than 0,5 mm.
Fit a new ring as follows:
Press the ring into the groove with a straight
board (l" x 4"), placed across the ring.

• If a new ring Is loo narrow, puI illnto hot waler,


70 - 80 ·C for aboul 5 mlnules.

If Ills loo wide II will recover after drying at


80 - 90 ·C for abouI 24 hours.

Exchange of seal ring in bowl hood.

41
3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 3 Service Instructions

Check the sealing edge (a) of the sliding bowl a


bottom.
If damaged through corrosion or erosion or in
other ways it can be rectified by turning in a
lathe. Minimum permissible height of sealing
edge: 4,5 mm.

----,.,.-------fMi n. 4,5 mm

Sealing edge on sliding


bowl bottom


.. _._- _...."
--_
.. -- ..-_-.... _---
... -- --
~-

Removal of seal ring on


sliding bowl bottom.

42
3 Service Instructions 3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service

3.3.6 Spindle top cone and bowl


body nave

Impact marks on the spindle cone or in the bowl


body nave may cause the separator to vibrate
while running.
Corrosion may cause the bowl to stick firmly to
the spindle cone and cause difficulties during the
next dismantling.
• Remove any impact marks using a scraper
and/or a whetstone.
Rust can be removed by using a fine-grain
emery cloth (e.g. No. 320).Finish with


polishing paper (e.g. No. 600).

[MOTE]
Always use a scraper with great care. The conicity
must not be marred.

Use whetstone or scraper with great care

3.3.7 Threads of inlet pipe, paring


disc

• Damage to threads or a broken paring disc can


prevent correct tightening of the inlet pipe and
cause the paring disc to scrape against the top
disc, even though the height adjustment of the
paring disc has been made correctly.
1 Examine the threads for damage and rectify if
required.
2 Examine the paring disc for damage and to
see if the disc walls have parted. If they have,
the inlet pipe has to be replaced with a new
one.

43
3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 3 Service Instructions

3.3.8 Threads on bowl hood and


bowl body

Excessive wear or impact marks on threads and


guide surfaces of the bowl hood or bowl body can
cause seizure damage.
Examine the thread condition by tightening the
bowl hood after removing the disc stack and top
disc from the bowl.
When the bowl is new the alignment marks on
the bowl hood and the bowl body should be
aligned. If not, contact an Alfa Laval
representative.


Wear
Ifthread wear is observed, mark the bowl body
at the new position by punching a new alignment
mark. If the mark on the bowl hood passes the
mark on the bowl body by more than 25° , (A in
the illustration) an Alfa Laval representative /.
/f
. I

,-), ---
should be contacted immediately. I

The measure A in millimetres (mm) is obtained 0 __


by calculating bowl outside diameter D times ./·/·~/·
0,2. / .'----


/ I

(M~---/
If the marks are illegible, an Alfa Laval
representative should be contacted for
determination and punching of new alignment
marks.

Disintegration hazards
Wear on threads must not exceed safety limit. f mark
on bowl hood must not pass f mark on bowl body by
more than 25°.

44
3 SeNice Instructions 3.3 Check points at Intermediate SeNice

Damage
Contact surfaces to inspect on the bowl
The position of threads, contact and guide
surfaces are indicated by arrows in the
illustration.
Examine for burrs and protrusions caused by
impact.
Clean the threads, contact and guide surfaces
with a suitable degreasing agent.


Cut hazard
The threads have sharp edges which can
cause cuts.
If damage is found, rectifY by using a whetstone
or fine emery cloth. Recommended grain size:
240.
Ifthe damage is bad, use a fine single-cut file,
followed by a whetstone. After rectifYing, the
threads have to be primed with Molykote 1000.

45
3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service 3 Service Instructions

3.3.9 Priming of bowl parts

The instruction refers to contact surfaces (dark


shaded) of both matching parts.
Before assembly:
1 These surfaces should be sprayed with
Molykote 0321 R after a careful cleaning.
2 Air cure for 15 minutes.
3 Polish to an even, homogenous surface.
4 Spray a second time.
5 Air cure for 15 minutes.
6

7
Polish to a shiny surface, the surface shoud
look like well polished leather when properly
done.
Finish the treatment by lubricating the

surfaces with lubricating paste see 5.7.3
Recommended lubricants, page 135.

46
3 Service Instructions 3.3 Check points at Intermediate Service

3.3.10 Disc stack pressure

The bowl hood exerts a pressure on the disc


stack clamping it in place.

1
[I&01'£J
Insufficient pressure in the disc stack may alfectthe 2
bowl balance, which in turn will cause abnormal
vibration of the separator and shorten the life of ball
bearings.

1 Place the bowl hood on the top of the disc 3


stack and tighten it by hand.
The assembly mark on the bowl hood should


now be positioned at the angle a (see
illustration), 30° - 60° ahead of the
corresponding mark on the bowl body. 1 Bowl hood
2 Bowl body
3 Disc stack. Number of discs
2 If the bowl hood can be tightened by hand - below wing insert: 42
without resistance until the marks are in line - above wing insert: at least 41
with each other, an extra disc must be added
to the top of the disc stack beneath the top
disc.

3 If one or more discs have been added re-


check the disc stack pressure by repeating
the procedure above.

[1&01'£]

• The top disc can stick inside the bowl hood


and fall when the hood is lifted.

a Angle 30° - 60° between assembly marks


before final tightening

47
3.4 Check points at Major Service 3 Service Instructions

3.4 Check points at Major


Service

3.4.1 Paring disc height adjustment

The height of the paring disc above the frame


hood must be measured if the bowl spindle has
been dismantled or if the bowl has been replaced
with a new one.

Incorrect height position can cause the paring disc


(14) to scrape against the paring chamber cover.

Pay attention to scraping noise at start-up after


service. •

1 Assemble the bowl and frame hood as


described in chapter 4.1.2 Inlet/outlet and
bowl - assembly, page 76.
2 Measure the distance according to the

3
illustration above. Adjust the distance by
adding or removing height adjusting rings (7).
Fit the support ring (5) and the inlet/outlet
housing. Tighten the nut with 30 Nm.

Left-hand thread!

48
3 Service Instructions 3.4 Check points at Major Service

4 Rotate the bowl spindle by hand by means of


the flat belt. If it does not rotate freely or if a
scraping noise is heard, incorrect height 30Nm
adjustment or incorrect fitting of the inlet pipe
can be the cause. Remove the parts and
readjust.
5 Finally, fit the safety device.

/ -----

49
3.4 Check points at Major Service 3 Service Instructions

3.4.2 Radial wobble of bowl spindle

The bowl spindle wobble must be measured if


the bowl spindle has been dismantled or if rough
bowl run (vibration) occurs.

[MO'f£J
Spindle wobble will cause rough bowl run. This leads
to vibration and reduces lifetime of ball bearings.

Check the wobble before removing the bowl


spindle.
If the bowl spindle has been dismantled check


the wobble before installing the bowl.
1 Fit a dial indicator in a support and fasten it in
position as illustrated.
2 Remove the water tank from the frame bottom
part for access to the flat belt. Use the flat belt
Max. 0,04 mm
to turn the spindle.
3 Permissible radial wobble: max. 0,04 mm.

If the spindle wobble is more than the


maximum permitted value, contact Alfa Laval
representatives.
4 Finally fit the water tank to the frame bottom
part.
Incorrect belt tension causes displacement of the
vertical line ofthe spindle centre, but does not
affect the wobble of the spindle.

50
3 Service Instructions 3.5 3-year service

3.5 3·year service

Exchange of frame feet


See 4.8.1 Mounting of new frame feet, page 115.

Friction coupling
Exchange of ball bearings, see 4.3.2 Friction
coupling - assembly, page 103.

Frame intermediate part


Replace a-ring and gasket, see 4.2.2 Bowl

• spindle and frame - assembly, page 92.

51
3.6 Lifting instructions 3 Service Instructions

3.6 Lifting instructions


1 Remove the inleVoutlet housings. the frame
hood and the bowl according to the
instructions in chapter 4.1.1 InleVoutlet and
bowl - dismantling. page 71.
<2mm

Make sure to remove the cap nut fixing the bowl to


the bowl spindle.
Before lifting the bowl, check that the bowl hood
has been screwed home into the bowl body. Less
than 2 mm of bowl hood threading must remain
above the bowl body edge. See illustration.
When lifting the bowl, use the compression tool
fastened on the distributor.

2 Disconnect the motor cables.


A •
3 Tighten the frame hood.
4 Fit the lifting eyes. The two eyebolts must be
fitted in the holes nearest to the electric motor.
S Use two endless slings to lift the separator.
Length of each sling: minimum 1.5 metres.
Thread the slings through the lifting eyes and
fit them to the hook of the hoist.
6 Unscrew the foundation bolts.


7 When lifting and moving the separator. obey
normal safety precautions for lifting large
heavy objects. A Minimum 750 mm distance between lifting eye
and hook.
Do not lift the separator unless the bowl has Use a lifting hook with catch.
been removed.
[MOTE]
8 Remove the lifting eyes afterwards.
Separator without bowl: Use lifting slings for
WLL300 kg.

Bowl: Use lifting slings for WLL 100 kg.

Crush hazards
Use only the two special lifting eyes (M12) for lifting
the machine. They are to be screwed into the special
threaded holes.
Other holes are not dimensioned for lifting the
machine.
A failing separator can cause accidents resulting In
serious injury and damage.

52
3 Service Instructions 3.7 Cleaning

3.7 Cleaning

External cleaning Use a brush and a sponge or cloth when cleaning.

The external cleaning of frame and motor should


be restricted to brushing, sponging or wiping
while the motor is running or is still hot.
Never wash down a separator with a direct
water stream. Totally enclosed motors can be
damaged by direct hosing to the same extent as
open motors and even more than those, because:
• Many operators believe that these motors are
sealed, and normally they are not.

• • A water jet played on these motors will


produce an internal vacuum, which will suck
the water between the metal-ta-metal contact
surfaces into the windings, and this water
cannot escape.
• Water directed on a hot motor may cause
condensation resulting in short-circuiting and
Never wash down a separator with a direct
internal corrosion. water stream or spray.

Be careful even when the motor is equipped with


a protecting hood. Never play a water jet on the
ventilation grill of the hood.

53
3.7 Cleaning 3 Service Instructions

3.7.1 Cleaning agents


When using chemical cleaning agents, make
sure you follow the general rules and suppliers'
recommendations regarding ventilation,
protection of personnel, etc.

For separator bowl, inlet and outlet


A chemical cleaning agent must dissolve the
deposits quickly without attacking the material
of the separator parts.

• For cleaning of lube oil separators the most


important function of the cleaning agent is to
be a good solvent for the gypsum in the
sludge. It should also act as a dispersant and
emulsifier for oil. It is recommended to use
Alfa Laval cleaning liquid for lube oil
separators which has the above mentioned

qualities. Note that carbon steel parts can be
damaged by the cleaning agent if submerged
for a long time.
• Fuel oil sludge mainly consists of complex
organic substances such as asphaltenes. The
most important property of a cleaning liquid
Alfa Laval cleaning liquid for lube oil
for the removal of fuel oil sludge is the ability and fuel oil separators.
to dissolve these asphaltenes.

Skin irritation hazard


Read the instructions on the label of the plastic

container before using the cleaning liquid.

Always wear safety goggles, gloves and protective


clothing as the liquid Is alkaline and dangerous to
skin and eyes.

54
3 Service Instructions 3.7 Cleaning

For parts of the driving devices


Use white spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene or
diesel oil.

Oiling (protect surfaces against corrosion)


Protect cleaned carbon steel parts against
corrosion by oiling. Separator parts that are not
assembled after cleaning must be wiped and
coated with a thin layer of clean oil and
protected from dust and dirt.

3.7.2 Cleaning of bowl discs

• Bowl discs
Handle the bowl discs carefully so as to avoid
damage to the surfaces during cleaning.

[MO"f£J
Mechanical cleaning is likely to scratch the disc
surfaces causing deposits to form quicker and
adhere more firmly.

A mild chemical cleaning is therefore preferable to


mechanical cleaning.

1 Remove the bowl discs from the distributor


and lay them down, one by one, in the


cleaning agent.
2 Let the discs remain in the cleaning agent until
the deposits have been dissolved. This will Put the discs one by one into the
cleaning agent.
normally take between two and four hours.

3 Finally clean the discs with a soft brush.

Cut hazards
The discs have sharp edges that can cause cuts.
Clean the discs with a soft brush.

55
3.8 Oil change 3 Service Instructions

3.8 Oil change

3.8.1 Oil change procedure

[M01'£J
Before adding or renewing lubricating oil in the oil
sump, the information concerning different oil
groups, handling of oils, oil change intervals etc.
given In chapter 5.7 LUbricants, page 133 must be
well known.

The separator should be level and at standstill


when oil is filled or the oil level is checked. The
MIN-line on the sight glass refers to the oil
level at standstill.

1
2
Place a collecting vessel under the drain hole.
Pull out (A) the oil filling device and turn it half

a turn (B).

3 Collect the oil in the vessel.

Burn hazards
The lUbricating oil and various machine surfaces can

be sufficiently hot to cause burns.

56
3 Service Instructions 3.8 Oil change

4 Turn the oil filling device back to its normal


position (A), the drain hole pointing upwards.

["o'(£J
When changing from one group of 011 to another, the
frame housing and the spindle parts must be
thorougly cleaned before the new 011 is filled.

5 Fill the oil sump in the frame housing with new


oil. The oil level should be slightly above


middle of the sight glass. Information on
volume see 5.2 Technical data, page 119.
6 Push in the oil filling device.

57
3.9 Vibration 3 Service Instructions

3.9 Vibration

3.9.1 Vibration analysis

A separator normally vibrates and produces a


different sound when passing through its critical
speeds during run-up and run-down.
It also vibrates and sounds to some extent when
running. It is good practice to be acquainted with
these normal conditions.
Excessive vibrations and noise indicate that
something is wrong. Stop the separator and
identify the cause.
Use vibration analysis equipment to periodically
check and record the level of vibration.
The level ofvibration ofthe separator should not ."
f:::

exceed 9 mm1s. :;!~ I::::"•.\;';'r~·.~ ••~.~.-~----,.".••,.,-",.,=1
.•~.~
. 71\

Disintegration hazards
When excessive vibration occurs, keep bowl filled
and stop separator.

The cause of the vibration must be identified and


corrected before the separator is restarted.

Excessive vibration can be due to incorrect


assembly or poor cleaning of the bowl.

58
3 SeNice Instructions 3.9 Vibration

3.9.2 Vibration switch (optional)


Adjustment of setpoint

The vibration switch is adjusted with the


separator in operation. The cover must be
removed to gain access to the setpoint adjusting
screw (1).
1 Back-off the setpoint adjusting screw counter-
clockwise (A) two or three turns. Press the
reset button. If the armature does not remain
in the reset position, turn the adjusting screw
another turn or two until the armature stays in
position when the reset button is pressed.

• 2 Now turn the adjusting screw slowly clockwise


until the armature rocks. Mark this position
with a line immediately in front-of the adjusting
screw pointer (2).
3 Back-off the adjusting screw counter-
clockwise a three-quarter turn. Press the reset
button. If the armature now rocks, turn the
adjusting screw counter-clockwise another
quarter turn and so on until the armature
remains in the reset position.
Setpoint adjustment

Refit the cap and fasten with the screws. 1. Adjusting screw
2. Pointer
A. Direction of increased checkpoint
["01'£J (admit higher vibration)


Further adjustment may become necessary If alarm
occurs due to vibration from surrounding equipment.

59
3.10 General directions 3 Service Instructions

3.10 General directions

3.10.1 Ball and roller bearings

Specially designed bearings for the bowl ~~-1


spindle _r 3 2
The bearings used for the bowl spindle are
special to withstand the speed, vibration,
temperature and load characteristics of high- 4
speed separators.
Only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts should be
used.


1. Outer race
A bearing that in appearance looks equivalent to 2. Ball/roller
the correct may be considerably different in 3. Inner race
4. Cage
various respects: inside clearances, design and
tolerances of the cage and races as well as
material and heat treatment.

[NO'T£J
Using an Incorrect bearing can cause a serious
breakdown with injury to personnel and damage to
equipment as a result.

Do not re-fit a used bearing.


Always replace it with a new one.

Dismantling
Remove the bearing from its seat by using a
puller. If possible, let the puller engage the inner
ring, then remove the bearing with a steady force
until the bearing bore completely clears the
entire length ofthe cylindrical seat.

The puller should be accurately centered during
dismantling; otherwise it is easy to damage the
seating.
For bearings where no driving-off sleeve
is included in the tool kit, use a puller
when removing bearings.

Do not hit with a hammer directly on the bearing.

60
3 Service Instructions 3. 10 General directions

Cleaning and inspection


Check shaft (spindle) end and/or bearing seat
in the housing for damage indicating that the
bearing has rotated on the shaft (spindle) and/
or in the housing respectively. Replace the
damaged part, ifthe faults cannot be remedied
by polishing or in some other way.

Assembly
• Leave new bearings in original wrapping until
ready to fit. The anti-rust agent protecting a
new bearing should not be removed before
use.


• Use the greatest cleanliness when handling
Clean and smear the bearing seating
the bearings. before assembly.

To facilitate assembly and also reduce the risk of


damage, first clean and then lightly smear the
bearing seating on shaft (spindle) or
alternatively in housing, with a thin oil.

• When assembling ball bearings. the bearings


must be heated in oil to maximum 125 QC.

[NOTE]

• Heat the bearing In a clean container with a cover.

Use only clean oil with a flash point above 250 "C.

The bearing must be well covered by the 011 and not


be in direct contact with the sides or the bottom of
the container. Place the bearing on some kind of
support or suspended in the oil bath. The bearing must not be in direct contact
with the container.

61
3.10 General directions 3 Service Instructions

• There are several basic rules for assembling


cylindrical bore bearings:
- Never directly strike a bearing's rings, cage
or rolling elements while assembling. A ring
may crack or metal fragments break off.
- Never apply pressure to one ring in order to
assemble the other.
- Use an ordinary hammer. Hammers with
soft metal heads are unsuitable as
fragments of the metal may break off and
enter the bearing.
- Make sure the bearing is assembled at a


Use a driving-on sleeve for bearings that are not
right angle to the shaft (spindle). heated,

• If necessary use a driving-on sleeve that


abuts the ring which is to be assembled with
an interference fit, otherwise there is a risk that
the rolling elements and raceways may be
damaged and premature failure may follow.

Angular contact ball bearings


Always fit single-row angular contact ball
bearings with the wide shoulder of the inner race
facing the axial load (upwards on a bowl
spindle). The wide shoulder of the inner race must
face the axial load.

62
3 Service Instructions 3. 10 General directions

3.10.2 Before shut-downs

Before the separator is shut-down for a period of


time, the following must be carried out:
• Remove the bowl, according to instructions in
chapter 4 Dismantling/Assembly, page 65.
• Protect parts in contact with process liquid
from corrosion by applying a thin layer of oil.

• Remove the O-rings.


Protect cleaned carbon steel parts against
corrosion by oiling. Separator parts that are not
assembled after cleaning must be wiped and


protected against dust and dirt.

[NOTE]
The bowl must not be left on the spindle during
standstill for more than one week.

Vibration in foundations can be transmitted to the


bowl and produce one-sided loading of the bearings.

The resultant Indentations in the ball bearing races


can cause premature bearing failure.
Remove the bowl if the separator is left at
If the separator has been shut-down for more standstill for more than one week.
than 3 months but less than 12 months, an
Intermediate Service (IS) has to be made before
the separator is put into operation again.
If the shut-down period has been longer than 12

• months, a Major Service (MS) should be carried


out.

63
4 Dismantling/Assembly

Contents

4.1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 68


4.1.1 InleVoutlet and bowl -dismantling 71
4.1.2 InleVoutlet and bowl -assembly 76

4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 86

• 4.2.1
4.2.2
Bowl spindle and frame -dismantling 86
Bowl spindle and frame -assembly

4.3 Friction coupling


92

100
4.3.1 Friction coupling -dismantling 101
4.3.2 Friction coupling -assembly 103

4.4 Flat belt and tightener 107


4.4.1 Belt replacement and tightening 107

4.5 Oil filling device 112


4.5.1 Dismantling/assembly 112


4.6 Water tank 113

4.7 Brake 113


4.7.1 Exploded view 113
4.7.2 Checking of friction element 114

4.8 Frame feet 115


4.8.1 Mounting of new frame feet 115

65
4 Dismantling/Assembly

References to check points


In the text you will find references to the check
point instructions in chapter 5. The references
appear in the text as in the following example:

III Check point


3.3.10 Disc stack pressure, page 47.
In this example, look up check point Disc stack
pressure for further instructions.

Switch off and lock power supply before starting any


dismantling work.

Tools
Special tools from the tool kit must be used for
dismantling and assembly. The special tools are
specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue.

Additional tools needed for dismantling but not
included in the tool kit are shown here.

For bowl and bowl spindle 2 3 4


1 Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (50 Nm) with socket 16 mm
3 Pliers for internal snap ring
4 Ball bearing puller
6,7
5
6
7
Screw vice with copper liners
Adjustable wrench, length approx. 400 mm
Adjustable wrench or spanner, width of jaws
24 mm

Two lifting slings, working load limit (WLL):
>300 kg are also needed.

66
4 Dismantling/Assembly

For friction coupling and flat belt


1 Pliers for internal snap ring 5

2 Pliers for external snap ring


3 T-handle, extension rod and socket 16 mm
4 Adjustable wrench or spanner, width ofjaws
36 mm
5 Hammer

67
4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 Dismantling/Assembly

4.1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

+---- 1. Safety device


2. Nut -----.!~
Interlocking switch (optional)
6. Insert
Entrapment hazard ~+r:n~ The support ring is removed
To avoid accidental start.
switch off and lock power from the frame hood top, at
supply before starting any paring disc adjustment (Major
Service).
dismantling work.
(IS) ---;<I~

3. InleVoutlet housing
5. Support ring

7. Height adjusting ring

8. Frame hood

~~~~.i-i~~~9' Lock ring

0 - - - - 11. Gravity disc/Clarifier disc

1J~·»-----13. Paring chamber cover


IS Intermediate service kit
MS Major service kit
(IS)-==~~
(IS)~~~ •
1 - - - - - 1 4 . Inlet pipe with paring disc
A~.....

68
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

15. Bowl hood

16. Top disc - - ,

• 17. Bowl discs -----iil

18. Wing insert -----if rF';'f

19. Bowl discs ------t.

20. Distributor -----11

• 21. Sliding bowl bottom

IS Intermediate service kit


MS Major service kit

__________J

69
4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 Dismantling/Assembly

22. Cap nut


+------:j1.-.. .::::===--(IS)
~ Left-hand thread

6i:t2===-(IS)
23. Upper distributing ring

(IS)
~:j::7-(IS)


24. Valve plugl-------.!.

~~~~~~~
(IS)
25. Operating slide---f.

(IS)

IS)
26. Lower distributing ring_ _ r'
.--~

(IS)
(IS)

27. Bowl body

28. Nozzle,--
~-.-._--~_~
•.. , ..-...~ ..
IS Intermediate service kit

70
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

4.1.1 Inlet/outlet and bowl -


dismantling
The frame hood and the heavy bowl parts must
be lifted by means of a hoist. Position the hoist
exactly above the bowl centre. Use an endless
sling and a lifting hook with catch.
The parts must be handled carefully. Don't
place parts directly on the floor, but on a clean
rubber mat, fibreboard or a suitable pallet.

1 Remove safety device and look through the


slot in the frame hood to see if the bowl still
rotates .

• Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work.

The bowl parts can remain very hot for a


considerable time after the bowl has come to a
standstill.
,-
• .

~~~~
." ....:--

2 Unscrew nut clockwise and lift off inlet- outlet


housing together with the connecting hoses.
When removing the connecting hoses, do not
drop the washer.
Left-hand thread!

71
4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 Dismantling/Assembly

3 Remove the bolts and lift off frame hood (8).


4 Unscrew lock ring (9) clockwise by using the
special tool; spanner for lock ring.
Left-hand thread!

5 Lift off gravity disc (clarifier disc) (11).



6 Carefully prise loose paring chamber cover ~13
(13) by using a screwdriver. Lift off the paring
chamber cover.

[MOTE)
II the gravity disc has to be replaced owing to
changed operating conditions, see 5.7.2 AlIa Laval
lubricating oil groups, page 134.

72
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

7 Lift out inlet pipe (14) with the paring disc.

8 Preparations for unscrewing of bowl hood


(15):
• - Fit the spanner to the bowl hood and secure
it with the bolt (a).
- Fit the compression tool and screw down
the central screw (b) until it stops
- Compress the disc stack by tightening the
nut (c) firmly.

[M01'£J
Use the compression tool as instructed.
Use 01 substitute tools can damage the equipment.

9 Unscrew bowl hood (15) clockwise by using a


tin hammer.
Left-hand thread!

10 Lift off the bowl hood with the spanner still 15


attached.

73
4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 Dismantling/Assembly

11 Lift out the top disc. the bowl discs with wing
insert and the distributor.
Screw the nut of the compression tool up
against the eye bolt, turn the unit with the tool
still attached upside down and hit it against a
firm base. This will facilitate loosening of the
top disc.


12 Lift out sliding bowl bottom (21) using the •
special tool.
Ease the sliding bowl bottom off with the
central screw of the tool. If necessary. knock
on the handle.

13 Unscrew cap nut (22).


Left-hand thread!
14 Remove upper distributing ring (23) using the
special tool.
Detach the distributing ring either:
- by jerking, or
- by tightening the nuts equally
~-~~~---1~

74
4 Dismantling!Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

15 Lift out operating slide (25) using the special


tool: lifting bolts for operating slide.

25

16 Lift out lower distributing ring (26).

~26

17 Lift out bowl body (27) using the special tool.

18 Ease the bowl body off with the central screw


of the tool. If necessary, knock on the handle.
19 Soak and clean all parts thoroughly in suitable
cleaning agent, see 3.7.1 Cleaning agents,
page 54.
20 Clean nozzles (28) in bowl body (27) using
soft iron wire of maximum 1,2 mm diameter,
see 3.3.4 Discharge mechanism, page 40.

• [MOTE]
Dirt and lime deposits in the sludge discharge
mechanism can cause discharge malfunction or
failing discharge.

21 Remove O-rings and replace them with spares


from the intermediate service kit (IS).

75
4.1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 Dismantling/Assembly

4.1.2 Inlet/outlet and bowl -


assembly
Make sure that the following check points are
carried out before and during assembly of the
separator bowl.
Check point
3.3.1 Corrosion, page 36,
3.3.2 Erosion, page 38,
3.3.3 Cracks, page 39,
3.3.4 Discharge mechanism, page 40,
3.3.6 Spindle top cone and bowl body nave,
page 43,
3.3.7 Threads of inlet pipe, paring disc, page
43,


3.3.8 Threads on bowl hood and bowl body,
page 44,
3.3.10 Disc stack pressure, page 47,
3.4.1 Paring disc height adjustment, page 48.

76
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

22. Cap nut +-----(" Left-hand thread

(IS)
(IS)
23. Upper distributing ring

(IS)
(IS)
24. Valve plug

• 25. Operating slide


(IS)

(IS)

(IS)
26. Lower distributing ring r-
(IS)
(IS)

27. Bowl body

• 28. Nozzle,---~========-./
IS Intermediate service kit

77
4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 Dismantling/Assembly

IS Intermediate service kit


MS Major service kit

15. Bowl hood

16. Top disc --__..9

17. Bowl discs ------fil

18. Wing insert - - - I



19. Bowl discs - - - 4 . .

20. Distributor ----~I [NOTE]


Be sure bowl parts are not
interchanged.

21. Sliding bowl bottom Out 01 balance vibration


will reduce ball bearing
life.

__________J

78
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

4 - - - - - - 1. Safety device
2. Nut ---.l:EllI" Interlocking switch (optional)
6. Insert

IS Intermediate service kit


'iifliI.--+-r~
The support ring is removed
MS Major service kit from the frame hood top, at
paring disc adjustment (Major
Service).

3. Inlel/outlet housing
5. Support ring

7. Height adjusting ring

• ~

~~·~i--~:::9' Lock ring

q - - - - 11. Gravity disc/Clarifier disc

~~~..----13. Paring chamber cover


(IS)-==~~


(IS)~~~
[MOTE]
Be sure bowl parts are not
Interchanged.

Out of balance vibration


will reduce ball bearing 1 - - - - - 1 4 . Inlet pipe with paring disc
life. .....-<:=-,

79
4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 Dismantling/Assembly

1 Clean the hollow part (b) of the spindle top


and the radial hole (a). Wipe clean the spindle
top and nave bore in the bowl body. Apply oil
to the tapered end of the spindle, smear the oil
over the surface and wipe off surplus with a
clean cloth.

2 Clean the nozzles in the bowl body, see 3.3.4


Discharge mechanism, page 40.

Check point
3.3.6 Spindle top cone and bowl body nave,
page 43 and 3.3.9 Priming of bowl parts, page
46.

3 Fit the bowl body (27) on the spindle.


Avoid damaging the spindle cone.
- Attach the special lifting tool to the bowl

body nave.
- Screw down the central screw of the tool,
then lower the bowl body until the screw
rests on the spindle top.
- Screw up the central screw and the bowl
body will sink down on the spindle cone.

4 Place the lower distributing ring (26) in the


bowl body.

Using the lifting bolts fit the operating slide


(25).

Make sure that the seal rings lie concentrically


in their grooves.

If replacing valve plugs (24), use a rubber


mallet.

25

80
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

5 Fit the upper distributing ring so that drill mark


(a) is in line with hole (c) on the distributing
ring.

When the distributing ring is in correct position


the guide pin (b) will enter hole (c).

[tlO1'£J
The two guide pin (b) in the distributing ring have to
be filled properly in the hole (c).

Check the distance"A". If the play is larger than 2


mm the guide pins have not entered the holeproperly.


6 Screw cap nut (22) counter-clockwise onto the
spindle.
Tighten firmly.
Left-hand thread!
22

7 Fit sliding bowl bottom (21).


Make sure that the square seal ring lies
concentrically in its groove.
Press the sliding bowl bottom down on the
upper distributing ring.

81
4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 Dismantling/Assembly

Checkpoint
Before assembling the bowl discs, check the
threads of the bowl hood and bowl body, see
3.3.8 Threads on bowl hood and bowl body,
page 44.

8 Assemble the bowl discs with wing insert and


top disc on the distributor. Note the angular
positioning (six options).
Ensure that the pins in the distributor fit
properly into the holes of the top disc.

9 Preparations for lifting in the disc stack


- Fit the compression tool and screw down
the central screw (a) until it stops
- Tighten the compression nut by hand
10 Fit the disc stack assembly in the bowl body.
Make sure that the cuts in the wings on the
underside of the distributor fit properly in the
corresponding lugs of the bowl.

11 Fit bowl hood (15):


a
- Apply a thin layer of Molykote Paste 1000 to
threads and on contact and locating


surfaces.
- Fit the spanner for the bowl hood and
secure it with the bolt (a).
- Screw on the bowl hood by hand.
Left-hand thread!

82
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

12 Fit the compressing tool and screw down the


central screw (a) until it stops.
Compress the disc stack by tightening the nut
(b) firmly.

[MOTE]
Use the compression tool as instructed.
Use of substitute tools can damage the equipment.

Check point
3.3.10 Disc stack pressure, page 47.

• 13 Attach the spanner and tighten the bowl hood


by using a tin hammer.
Strike the spanner handle until the bowl hood
lies tightly against the bowl body. In a new
bowl, the assembly marks now will be in line
with each other.

Disintegration hazard
The assembly mark on the bowl hood must never
pass the mark on the bowl body by more than 25'.

• See also 3.3.8 Threads on bowl hood and bowl


body, page 44.

14 Place inlet pipe (14) in the bowl.


Checkpoint
3.3.7 Threads of inlet pipe, paring disc, page
43.

83
4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl 4 D$rnanWnglAssernbly

15 Fit paring chamber cover (13) by pressing it


down gently. ~~3
16 Assemble gravity discI clarifier disc (11). ~

17 Fit lock ring (9).


Apply a thin layer of Molykote Paste 1000 to
the threads and on contact and locating
surfaces.

Left-hand thread!


18 Fit frame hood (8).
The two eye-bolts must be fitted in the holes
nearest to the electric motor.

In case of Major Service remove the


connecting housing and fit a new O-ring on
the insert (2).

Checkpoint
3.4.1 Paring disc height adjustment, page 48.
To be performed at Major Service and if the
bowl spindle has been dismantled.

84
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4. 1 Inlet/outlet and bowl

19 Fit inleVoutlet housing.


Tighten nut.
30 Nm
Left-hand thread!
20 Then rotate the bowl by means of the flat belt.
If the bowl does not rotate freely or a scraping
noise is heard, incorrect bowl assembly or
incorrect height adjustment of the paring disc
can be the cause.

[M01'£J
To avoid damage on the inlet pipe the tightening
torque must not exceed 30 Nm.

• 21 Make sure that the gasket on the safety device


is in position. If not, glue with Loctite 407.
Fit and secure safety device.
22 Fit the connecting hoses if they have been
removed. Make sure to fit their gasket rings.
23 Fit the water tank on the frame bottom part if it
has been removed .

85
4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 4 Dismantling/Assembly

4.2 Bowl spindle and


frame

4.2.1 Bowl spindle and frame -


dismantling
Before dismantling the bowl spindle, the inlet
and outlet housing, frame hood and bowl as
well as the flat belt must be removed.
Before dismantling, in the case of Major
Service, or if the separator vibrates while
running, see
Check point
3.4.2 Radial wobble of bowl spindle, page 50.

1. Lip seal

2. Screen
ring~ (3-YSKI
,.,",,,~.
y
3YSK Parts to be renewed at
Three year seNiee

3. GaSket~~~=~~~~~
4. Frame, top part_-+

-----------j

86
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.2 Bowl spindle and frame

f-------a-J>--.",...... 5. Deflector ring

6. Top bearing cover :':~~~~~5----


7. Gasket (MS)
MS Parts to be renewed at
Major Service

~~--(MS)

11. Bowl spindle - - - J

o
• 12. Ball bearing hOlder~~
13. Ball bearing
'C

~---(MS)
14. Snap ring

15. Ball bearing--f~-f----(MS)

16. Oil pump----j

17. Belt pulley----i

18. Pump sleeve

• 19. Rubber buffer


"
20. O-ring-::z-::;~~~~~
~~?>t':~(MS)
21. Frame, intermediate

22. a-ring --~


--_ ....

87
4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 4 Dismantling/Assembly

1 Loosen but do not remove the motor adapter


screws.
2 Remove the water tank.
3 Remove the brake.
4 Remove the flat belt.

5 Remove the screws and lift off frame top part


(4). Lip seal ring (1) must be removed in the

case of 3-year service or if found damaged.

88
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.2 Bowl spindle and frame

6 Clean the bowl spindle cone in place and


remove deflector ring (5).

~-5

• 7 Remove, in the following sequence:


- Top bearing cover (6)
- Gasket (7)
. ""'=
- Fan (8)
- Buffer holder (9)
- Rubber buffer (10). 6
[MOTE] ~6
Be very careful not to damage the wings of
the buffer holder.
C );>-7
.l- ~ 8
~-9
• [[\ c;K..
0- 10

__..
._---:::::._--~~.

89
4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 4 Dismantling/Assembly

8 Screw the cap nut counter-clockwise (Ieft-


hand thread) onto the spindle top to protect I~ I
the top and bore.

Lift out spindle assembly (11), rubber buffer


(10) and O-ring (20).
11--1:.
Remove snap ring (14) by using a pair of
pliers and pull off ball bearing holder (12).

10-=

C :>-20

~
9 Clamp the bowl spindle (11) in a screw vice.
Remove the pump sleeve (18). When turning
the spindle upside down there is a risk that the
vane in the pump sleeve can slide down partly


or entirely into the spindle. Therefore, after 18
unscrewing the sleeve, check that the vane
has not been damaged.
10 Remove the belt pulley (17). If the pulley has
stuck proceed with point 10.
J---!?,_11
11 Lubricate the mounting/dismantling tool.

Fit the mounting/dismantling tool and screw it


down as far as it will go (A).

Use a long spanner (450 - 650 mm) to press


the belt pulley off the spindle (B).

Remove the oil pump (16) by hand, do not


Oil,
~~
loos the flat key.

.........
Molykote paste 1000

90
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.2 Bowl spindle and frame

12 Pull off ball bearing (15) using a puller and


thrust washer. Thrust washer

Pull off bearing (13) using the special \


mounting tool and a hammer.

~~-15
[NOTE]
Always discard a used bearing.

• Special mounting tool


~l!!:L-13

In case of 3-year-service

13 Loosen the screws and lift off the frame


intermediate part (21).

14 Discard the O-ring (22).This O-ring is not


included in any service kit, but must be

• ordered separately.

91
4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 4 Dismantling/Assembly

15 Remove the screen (2) from the frame top part


(4).

Discard the gasket (3). This gasket is not


included in any service kit, but must be
ordered separately.

16 Clean the oil sump.


17 Clean all dismantled parts thoroughly in a

degreasing agent and check for damage and
corrosion.

Replace all parts supplied in the spare parts


kits.

4.2.2 Bowl spindle and frame -


assembly


The bowl spindle and frame is assembled in
reverse sequence to dismantling.

1. Lip seal ring~-(3-YSK) 3-YSK parts to be renewed at


3-years service kit
2. Screen ~y
-':"=;;.~

4. Frame, top part

-----------~

92
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.2 Bowl spindle and frame

Molykote 1000 paste


5. Deflector ring
,
4" Silicone grease (thin layer)
""'---eo."...-:JI
(thin layer to be rubbed into surface) - " ,
6. Top bearing cover MS Major service kit
7. Gasket ~~~5~--(MS)

• 11. Bowl spindle-----j

o
12. Ball bearing hOlder----.;:::::::;;;;:::~
13. Ball bearlng--t""""'"'}--- (MS)
14. Snap ring---C:I~

15. Ball bearing---f""""')------(MS)


16. Oil pump----l

17. Belt pulley----j

• 18. Pump sleeve

19. Rubber buffer


~~~-'(MS)
ISilicone grease (thin layer)

20. O-ring----:;Z~~~~~~~~ (MS)


21. Frame, intermediate

Loctite 242 •

93
4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 4 Dismantling/Assembly

In case of 3·year-service

1 Fit a new O-ring (22) and assemble the frame 21


intermediate part (21).

Use a torque wrench and tighten the screws


lightly crosswise at first. Then tighten all
around to 45 Nm.

Secure the screws with Loctite 242.

2 Fit a new gasket (3).

Fit the screen (2).


3 Clear the spindle bore from dirt and lime


deposits with the special reamer

94
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.2 Bowl spindle and frame

4 Inspect the tapered end and the hollow part of


the bowl spindle for wear and clean if
necessary. Assemble ball bearings (13 and
Mounting tool
15).

Heat the new ball bearings in oil to maximum


125°C. Use the special mounting tool from the
tool kit.

[MOTE] 1.....""""1-13

Always fit new bearings.

If in doubt how to install roller bearings in a correct


way, please see the detailed description in


3.10.1 Ball and roller bearings, page 60•

5 Fit oil pump, flat key and belt pulley. Make


sure that the recess in the belt pulley fits over ';
the guide pin in the oil pump.


Molykote 1000 paste
(Thin layer to be
rubbed into surface)

95
4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 4 Dismantling/Assembly

6 Check that the radial hole (0 1 mm) in the


pump sleeve is clean, and fit the pump.

7 Fit ball bearing holder (12) and secure it with


snap ring (14).

Fit O-ring (20) and rubber buffer (19).

Lower spindle assembly (11) carefully into the


separator intermediate frame.
11--+

19-~

C ~-20

~~

96
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.2 Bowl spindle and frame

8 Assemble, in the following sequence:


- Rubber buffer (10)

- Buffer holder (9)


- Fan (8)
- Gasket (7) Q

~6
- Top bearing cover (6)

Make sure that the 0 3 mm hole in fan (8) is


clean and the lugs in the fan enter the
recesses in the bowl spindle.
C >7
• Before tightening, make sure that there is
some play (a) between top bearing cover
(6) and the frame. The play will disappear
when the screws are tightened.
~-8

~-9
.-10
Tighten the screws sequentially (not
crosswise) in order to successively
compress the rubber buffers.

9 Push down deflector ring (5) till it stops.

• 5~
st?¥
~"
Silicone grease
(thin layer)

97
4.2 Bowl spindle and frame 4 Dismantling/Assembly

10 Assemble frame top part (4). If lip seal ring (1) Silicone grease
has been removed, fit a new one before the (thin layer)
frame top part is put in place.

Make sure the lip seal is turned the correct


way. See illustration.

Silicone grease
(thin layer)

11 Tighten the screws of the top frame using a
torque wrench (width across flats 16 mm).

Tighten the screws slightly crosswise at first.


Then tighten all around to 45 Nm.

Secure the screws with Loctite 242. Loctite 242

98
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.2 Bowl spindle and frame

12 Fit and adjust the flat belt, see 4.4.1 Belt


replacement and tightening, page 107.

Checkpoint
3.4.2 Radial wobble of bowl spindle, page 50.

13 Fit the water tank and tighten the screws.

99
4.3 Friction coupling 4 Dismantling/Assembly

4.3 Friction coupling


If the separator does not attain full speed
within about 2 minutes, the friction elements
or the coupling may be worn or greasy. The
friction elements must then be replaced with
new ones or be thoroughly cleaned from grease.

Entrapment hazards
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any dismantling


work.

1. Snap ring -----cD


2. Snap ring -----«:l

3. Ball bearings :::-~~~-:5. Belt pulley

5. Belt pulley

50Hz

6. Coupling hub _---L-:O'~.,

7. Friction element ---\!>e' I'§~


8. Cover
9. Snap ring-----=::is/
10. Washer--~:'9
11. Spring washer
12. Screw---"

(MS) = Set of friction elements


included in the Major service Kit for
50 Hzor 60 Hz

100
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.3 Friction coupling

4.3.1 Friction coupling -dismantling

1 Check that the belt tightener is in backward


position.
2 Remove the motor adapter screws. ..~
3 Remove the water tank and the flat belt.

Note that the tank must be lowered past


spindle end (A) before it can be withdrawn
(B).
4 Remove the flat belt.

• 5 Remove the electric motor complete with the


friction coupling and motor adapter.

Weight of motor including adapter and friction


coupling is not more than 35 kg.

6 Remove snap ring (9), cover (8) and friction


• elements (7).

If the friction elements are worn, fit new ones.


Replace all friction elements even if only one
is worn.

If the friction elements are only greasy:


Clean the friction elements and the inside of
belt pulley (5) with a degreasing agent.

101
4.3 Friction coupling 4 Dismantling/Assembly

7 Remove the screw (12), spring washer (11)


and washer (10) from the friction coupling.

Complete dismantling of the friction


coupling

8 Lubricate and fit the special mounting and


dismantling tool.

Ease off the coupling. p • Oil

~~
/~
I
J-cj
Mounting tool

Molykote 1000 Paste


(thin layer to be rubbed into
D~
surface) _ .

9 Remove snap rings (1 and 2) and drive off


coupling hub (6). Turn the coupling, i.e. belt
pulley (5) with bearings (3), the other way
round and drive off the ball bearings and it •
~
.
washer by using a tube.
~~~~"'
.--=~. .
10 Clean all parts in a degreasing agent and ...

replace parts supplied in the spare parts kits.

["01'£J
Always discard a used bearing.

102
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.3 Friction coupling

4.3.2 Friction coupling -assembly


Before the friction coupling is assembled,
examine all parts thoroughly for wear and
corrosion.

1 Assemble the new ball bearings in belt pulley


(5) by using a tube and a hammer.

Apply Loctite 641 on the outer surfaces of ball


bearings (3).

Knock down the bearings carefully (do not


forget washer 4) by using the tube which must
rest on the outer race of the bearing.

• The new bearings must not be heated as they


are packed with grease and sealed with
plastic membranes.
3
4
3
Loctite 641

After the assembly of the bearings, fit snap


ring (2).

[M01'£J
Do not refit used bearings.

103
4.3 Friction coupling 4 Dismantling/Assembly

2 Apply Loctite 641 on the coupling hub (6) and


knock it down into the belt pulley by using a
hammer.
3 Fit snap ring (1).


4 Wipe clean the motor shaft and apply a thin oil
film on it. Fit the special mounting and
dismantling tool to the motor shaft (by means
of the small screw on one end of the tool) and
press the friction coupling onto the shaft.
p • Oil

,~~
Molykote 1QOO Paste
(thin layer to be rubbed into
surface)
J-cj D
Mounting tool

_
=-----'
I
~

104
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.3 Friction coupling

5 Fit the screw (12) with the washer (11) and


spring washer (10) to secure the friction
coupling .

• Assembly of friction elements

6 Fit new friction elements (7), cover (8) and


snap ring (9).
- A coupling with two friction elements is
used for 60 Hz installations.
- A coupling with four friction elements is
used for 50 Hz installations.

105
4.3 Friction coupling 4 Dismantling/Assembly

7 Degrease and clean the contact surfaces of


frame and motor adapter. Lubricate the
contact surfaces with Molykote 1000 paste.
Then fit the electric motor with adapter and
friction coupling in position.

Also lubricate the threads of the belt tightener


with Molykote 1000 paste or similar.


8 Fit and tighten the flat belt, see 4.4. 1 Belt
replacement and tightening, page 10l.
9 Install the water tank and the cover.

[NOTEJ
The belt must be re-tlghtened before starting the
separator, see next page.

106
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.4 Flat belt and tightener

4.4 Flat belt and tightener


The flat belt must be removed before
dismantling of the bowl spindle or the friction
coupling. The procedure is the same when
replacing the belt at a Major Service.
A new belt must be re-tightened twice:
• 30 minutes after the belt has been installed.
The separator must not be started until the
re-tightening has been done.
• after approximately 24 hours of operation.

[MO'(£J
• Do not start the separator unless the flat belt has
been re-tightened after 30 minutes. If started, the
belt may slip and be damaged.

4.4.1 Belt replacement and


tightening
If only tightening of flat belt should be done,
only steps 3 and 7-11 have to be performed.

Entrapment hazards

• Make sure that rotating parts have come to a


complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work.

Look into the slot in the frame hood to see if


separator parts are rotating or not.

1 Remove the water tank and brake.

@I]h~
Note that the tank must be lowered past
spindle end (A) before it can be withdrawn
(B).

:~-----
,~,'

107
4.4 Flat belt and tightener 4 Dismantling/Assembly

2 Check that the belt tightener is in backward


position.

Pay attention to the air gap "A" between the cup


springs and the threaded sleeve.
The distance "A" must not exceed 0,5 mm.
Otherwise a correct belt tightening will be
Impossible.

3 Loosen but do not remove the motor adapter


screws.


Molykole 1000 Paste
To guarantee a proper function of the belt tlghtener It
Is advisable to protect the surfaces

Knock out the tubular spring pin and separate


the parts, lubricate and assemble the parts.

4 Remove the existing belt and clean the


raceways of the bowl spindle and the friction
coupling by using a degreasing agent. Wipe

the raceways with a clean rag after cleaning.

Exercise the greatest possible cleanliness.


There must be no dirt, oil or grease on the
raceways.

108
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.4 Flat belt and tightener

5 Remove the motor adapter screws. Lift the


motor together with adapter and friction
coupling and check that there is a sufficient
film of Molykote 1000 Paste, or an equivalent
lubricating paste, between the adapter and
the frame surface. Lower the motor after
checking. Fit the motor adapter screws but do
not tighten them.

The weight of motor including adapter and


friction coupling is not more than 35 kg.

The threads of the belt tightener should be


lubricated with a thin layer of Molykote 1000

• Paste.
(to be rubbed into surface)

6 Fit a new belt. Start on the motor side.


Tighten the belt by moving the motor
backwards by hand.
Pull the belt around a few turns by hand .


7 Rotate the belt tightener by rotating the shaft
until it makes contact with the frame pad.

109
4.4 Flat belt and tightener 4 Dismantling/Assembly

8 Tighten the shaft (1) further until the threaded


sleeve (2) and dog (3) are disengaged.
"Shake" the motor by hand several times
during this operation in order to overcome the
friction between the motor adapter and the
frame.

1 2


9 Tighten the motor adapter screws.

10 Loosen the belt tig htener by rotating the


threaded sleeve (2) backwards.
2 •

110
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.4 Flat belt and tightener

11 Rotate the shaft (1) relative to the threaded


sleeve (2) until the sleeve (2) and dog (3) are
engaged again with a clicking sound.

[NOTE]
If the springs (4) are not decompressed they will
loose their tension and correct tightening of belt will
be Impossible.

12 Let the belt stay in this position for at least 30


r::::---=----... . =

--
0,5
minutes without starting the separator. I

• Then repeat steps 3 and 7-11 above. After this


proceed to step 13.

[NOTE]
Do not start the separator unless the flat belt has
been re-tlghtened after 30 minutes.
" started, the belt may slip and be damaged.

13 Fit the water tank and brake.


14 The separator may now be started.

[NOTE)
The belt must be re-tightened when the separator has
been in operation approXimately 24 hours after the


belt change: Repeat steps 3 and 7-11.

111
4.5 Oil filling device 4 Dismantling/Assembly

4.5 Oil filling device

4.5.1 Dismantling/assembly
Drain off the oil, see 3.8 Oil change, page 56.
Unscrew nipple (4) and pull off the oil filling
device. Then unbend the round safety wire (6)
and pull off nipple (4).

1 If plate (8) is to be replaced, wipe the sight glass (7) with a degreasing agent.
2 Fit the new plate on the outside of the sight glass. The plate is self-adhesive.
3 Mark the position of the plate relative to the recess in sleeve (1).
Assemble the oil filling device and fit it into the frame. Note that the mark on sleeve (1) must be
positioned opposite the mark on the frame. Fill the sump with new oil.


6. Round safety wire

2. a-ring
1. Sleeve for oil filling

3. a-ring

~"
Silicone grease (thin layer)

112
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.6 Water tank

4.6 Water tank

Remove the water tank (1).


Note that the tank must be lowered past the
spindle end (A) before it can be withdrawn (B). 2. Elbow
::.
• Check the tank interior and clean out if
necessary.
• Check that the pipes are not defective.
Replace if necessary.
If the parts fitted on the tank have been
removed, it is necessary to fit the parts properly


together at assembly.
2. Elbow
• Seal the water inlet pipe with Loctite 573.

4.7 Brake

4.7.1 Exploded view

• 1. Spindle with friction element


2. Spring
3 Bracket

113
4.7 Brake 4 Dismantling/Assembly

4.7.2 Checking of friction element

A worn or oily friction element will lengthen the


stopping time. Remove bracket with the brake.
Examine the friction element.
• If the friction element is worn; Fit a new
complete spindle (includes friction element).
• If the friction element is oily; Clean the element
and its surface in contact with the belt pulley
with a suitable degreasing agent.

Checking of bracket, spindle and spring

Rust can form on the brake parts and cause the



brake to jam.
Remove rust from the spindle and the
corresponding guide surface on the bracket. Rub
the surface of the spindle with a thin layer of
lubricating paste. Replace the spring with a new
one if it has lost its stiffness. Oil the spring when
assembling.

Checking the brake


After the brake assembly has been fitted,
release the brake and rotate the bowl slowly by
hand. If a scraping noise is heard, the friction

element is probably touching the coupling
pulley surface (A). If so, it is necessary to adjust
the position of the motor adapter and re-
tighten the flat belt, see 4.4 Flat belt and
tightener, page 107.

114
4 Dismantling/Assembly 4.8 Frame feet

4.8 Frame feet

4.8.1 Mounting of new frame feet


When replacing the frame feet, the separator
must be lifted.
Remove the bowl before lifting the separator.
Follow 3.6 Lifting instructions, page 52.

1 Loosen the foundation bolts and lift the


separator.
2 Remove the existing frame feet.

• 3 Mount the new feet.


4 Place the separator in its original position and
fasten the foundation bolts.
5 Remove the two lifting eye bolts. 2
6 Assemble the separator bowl, see 4.1.2 Inlet!
outlet and bowl - assembly, page 76.
.'

115
SEPARATOR MANUAL 5 TECHNICAL REFERENCE

5 Technical Reference
5. 1 Product description 5 Technical Reference

5.1 Product description


I Affa Laval ref. 577445. rev. 0

Product number: 881100-04-02/0


Separator type: P 615
Application: Mineral oil
Technical design:
Purifier (clarifier as option)

IPartial discharge.
Machine bottom part for belt drive
Intended for marine and land applications.
Colour of finish painting of painted parts according to order.
Quality of painting according to specifications on drawings.
Sealings available in Nitrile.
Designed in accordance with directives and standards:

I 98/37IEC Directive ofthe European
Parliament and the Council
relating to machinery.

ISO 3744 Acostics - determination of sound


power levels of noise sources
using sound pressure.

IEN 292-2 Safety of machines - basic


concepts, general principles for
design.

Operational limits:
Max. Allowed speed 9510 r/minute
Discharge interwall: 2 - 60 minutes

Feed temperature: 0 ·C to + 100 ·C
Ambient temperature: + 5 ·C to + 55 ·C
Not to be used for liquids with flashpoint below 60·C
Maximum allowed density of operating liquid: 1000 kgIm3

118
5 Technical Reference 5.2 Technical data

5.2 Technical data


I AIfa Lava' ref. 561688. tBv. 2

Maximum density feed 1100 kg/m


sediment 2332 kg/m 3
Power consumption idling 0,9 kW

I1---------1-
I Bowl speed, synchronous
running (at max. capacity)
max. power consumption
9512/9307
--·----1-
2,0 kW
2,8 kW (at starting-up)
rev/min. 50Hz/60Hz
I Motor speed, synchronous 300013600 rev/min. 50Hz/60Hz
Gear ratio (pulleys) 130:41 (50 Hz)
106:41 (60 Hz)
...".,..."-."....-----.,,,,;~ 3,5 - 4,5 minut""e-s---~...........,.-"I--


Starting time
-,·---A:-;;-
Stopping time Running down without brake average 19 minutes
Wrth brake min. 3, max. 4 minutes


Weight

Motorpo_r
Bowl material AL 111 2377-02 stainless steel

CtlO'fE]
The separator is a component operating in an
integrated system including a monitoring system. If
the technical data in the system description does
not agree with the technical data in this instruction
manual, the data in the system description Is the
valid one.

119
5.3 Connection list 5 Technical Reference

5.3 Connection list


Alfa Laval ret 561658, rev. 1

Connection Description Requirementsllimits


No.

201 Inlet for process liquid.

- Flow: See 5.8.7 Performance data,

I 206
- Pressure:

Inlet for liquid seal and displacement liquid.


in- and outlet device, page
151

- Quali1y requirements: See 5.6 Water quality, page


I 132

220
- Flow, set value:

Outlet for light phase, clarified liquid.

- Counter pressure:
8 litreslminute

See 5.8.7 Performance data,



in- and outlet device, page
- Capacity: 151

(221) Outlet for heavy phase (water). Should be possible to drain


liquids by gravity.

222 Outlet for solid phase.


- Discharge volume: See 5.2 Technical data, page
I 119
The outlet after the separator
should be installed in such a
way that you can not fill the


frame top part with sludge.
(Guidance of sludge pump or
open outlet)

372 Inlet for discharge liquid.

- Flow, set value: 18 mreslminute

- Quality requirements: See 5.6 Water quality, page


I 132

120
5 Technical Reference 5.3 Connection list

Connection Description RequirementsJIimits


No.

373 Inlet for make-up liquid.

- Flow, set value: 0,9 I~res per minute

- Quality requirements: See 5.6 Water quality, page


I 132

- Consumption: 0,9 litres per discharge

377 Outlet for operating liquid. Should be possible to drain


liquids by gravity.

462 Drain of frame top part, lower. Should be possible to drain


liquids by gravity.

• 463

701
Drain of frame top part, upper.

Motor for separator


Should be possible to drain
liquids by grav~.

Allowed deviation from nominal frequency ±5%


(momentarily during maximum 5 seconds): (±10%)

753 Unbalance sensors, vibration

- Type: Mechanical switch

- Frequency range: < 300 Hz

- Vibration measurement range: < 4,5g

- Internal impedance: 4kQ±5%


- Reset coil voltage: 46VDC

- Reset coil power: Max. 14 W

- Switch rating, resistive load max 2A@24VDC

Location of connections on the separator, see


5.4 Basic size drawing, page 122, and 5.4.1
1
Dimensions of connections, page 123.

121
5.4 Basic size drawing 5 Technical Reference

5.4 Basic size drawing


Alia Laval rei 565298, tev. 2

64

~
~-~
(-----+---~ B

"l i J
I

([)J:I:i,It
\- cb


890 I I
I
807
TIill\p
I \\1 1
1// 7@
I 1
I

490 ~C.uy,-@ 204\I ""lk 552

1
I 458
372

Jf
,. ~

i i \if
'r .----
~4
/
,.--,J
/ /
l ///
I
/////////
l...=
\--;
~I
;

1/9 -l
24 ~ 181
~

197
r
!
183
I
465
I
163

LI---~'- ~--'-~ /~'----'====~


~
732
487
701

Connections 201 and 220 are turnable 90°.
A Maximum horizontal displacement during operation ±20 mm
B Maximum vertical displacement during operation ± 10 mm

122
5 Technical Reference 5.4 Basic size drawing

15.4.1 Dimensions of connections


AIfa Laval ret 565298 rav. 1

nB3B-==j 3$
~~
~~~
/SO-G 1/2

-n 4~
• /SO-G 1/2

~
/SO-G 1/2

. - . - - /663 ~ (2~

~~
/SO-G 3/4

• All dimensions are nominal.


Reservation for individuall deviations due to tolerance.
All connections to be installed non-loaded and flexible.
I Data for connections see 5.3 Connection list. page 120

123
5.5 Interface description 5 Technical Reference

5.5 Interface description


Alia Laval ret 565810. tev. 0

5.5.1 Scope
This document gives information, requirements
and recommendations about operational
procedures and signal processing for safe and
reliable operation of the separator. It is
intended to for designing auxiliary equipment
and control system for the separator.

5.5.2 References
This Interface Description is one
complementary document to the separator.
Other such documents that contain necessary
information and are referred to here are:

• Interconnection diagram
• Connection List
• Technical Data
• Operating Water Interface
Standards referred to are:
• EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency
stop equipment, functional aspects -
Principles of design
• EN 1037 Safety of machinery - Prevention of
unexpected start-up

5.5.3 Definitions

For the purpose ofthis document, the following
definitions apply:
• Synchronous speed: The speed the machine
will attain when it is driven by a three-phase
squirrel-cage induction motor and there is no
slip in the motor and the drive system.
• Full speed: The synchronous speed minus
normal slip.

124
5 Technical Reference 5.5 Interface description

5.5.4 Goal
To eliminate situations that can cause harm,
i.e. injury, damage to health or property and
unsatisfactory process result are e.g.:

Situation Effect
Unbalance caused by uneven sediment Too high stress on bowl and bearing
accumulation in the bowl. system which might cause harm.
Too high bowl speed. Too high stress on bowl which might
cause harm.
Access to moving parts. Can cause injury to person who
accidentally touches these parts.

• Insufficient cleaning of separator.


Bowl leakage.
Unsatisfactory product quality.
Product losses.

Information and instructions given in this


document aim at preventing these situations.
Control and supervision can be more or less
comprehensive depending on the type of used
control equipment. When a simple control unit
is used it would be impossible or too expensive
to include many of the functions specified here
while these functions could be included at
nearly no extra cost when a more advanced
control unit is used. For this reasons functions
that are indispensable or needed for safety

• reasons to protect the machine and/or


personnel are denoted with shall while other
functions are denoted with should.

125
5.5 Interface description 5 Technical Reference

5.5.5 Description of separator


modes.
For control purposes the operation of the
separator should be divided into different
modes.
The normally used modes are described below
but other modes might exist.
It is assumed that:
• The separator is correctly assembled.
• All connections are made according to
"Connection List". "Interconnection
Diagram" and "Interface Description".
• The separator control system is activated.
If above conditions are not fulfilled the
separator is unready for operation.

STAND STILL means:
• The power to the separator motor is off.
• The bowl is not rotating.
STARTING means:
• The power to the separator motor is on.
• The bowl is rotating and accelerating.
RUNNING means:
• The power to the separator motor is on.

a
The bowl is rotating at full speed.
RUNNING is a collective denomination for

number of sub modes which e.g. can be:



- STAND BY' Separator is in a waiting mode
and not producing.
- PRODUCTION: Separator is fed with
product and producing.
- CLEANING: Separator is fed with cleaning
liquids with the intention to clean the
separator.

126
5 Technical Reference 5.5 Interface description

STOPPING means:
• The power to the separator motor is off.
• The bowl is rotating and decelerating.
STOPPING is a collective denomination for
a number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
- NORMAL STOP: A manually or
automatically initiated stop.
- SAFETY STOP: An automatically initiated
stop triggered by too high vibrations.
- EMERGENCY STOP: A manually initiated
stop at emergency situations. This stop
will be in effect until it is manually reset.

• 5.5.6 Handling of connection


interfaces.

Electrical connections.

701 Separator motor.


The separator is equipped with a 3-phase DOL
(Direct On Line) started motor.
There shall be an emergency stop circuit
designed according to EN 418 and a power
isolation device according to EN 1037.

• There shall be a start button close to the


separator that shall be used for first start after
assembly of the separator.
There should be a counter to count number of
running hours.
There should be a current transformer to give
an analogue signal to the control unit about the
motor current.

127
5.5 Interlace description 5 Technical Reference

753 Unbalance sensor.


For indication of any abnormal unbalance and
to be able to perform appropriate
countermeasures, the separator may be
equipped with a vibration initiated mechanical
switch on the separator frame.
The vibration monitor shall include a self-check
function to be performed at least at initiation of
STARTING.
If to high vibrations occur the separator shall
be stopped the quickest way possible and it
shall not be restarted until the reasons for the
vibrations have been found and measures to
remove them have been taken.
Signal processing in STARTING:
• If to high vibrations occur the separator shall
be stopped automatically by SAFETY STOP.

• If the self-check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given and an automatic stop by
NORMAL STOP shall be initiated.
Signal processing in RUNNING:
• If to high vibrations occur the separator shall
be stopped automatically by SAFETY STOP.
• If the self-check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given.
Signal processing in STOPPING:


If the self-check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given.
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:
If to high vibrations occur the system shall

turn over automatically to SAFETY STOP.

5.5.7 Fluid connections.


Complementary information is given in 5.3
I
Connection list, page 120.

128
5 Technical Reference 5.5 Interface description

201 Inlet for process liquids (feed).


Processing in STAND STILL:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:
• Should be closed. Bowl will be open and
empty or closed and filled depending on if
start is done from STAND STILL or
STOPPING.

Processing in RUNNING:
• Could be closed or open.
• Shall be closed before a discharge. See


5.8.5 Operating water interface (purifier),
page 149 or 5.8.6 Operating water interface
(Clarifier), page 150.
Processing in NORMAL STOP or
EMERGENCY STOP:
• Could be closed or open but the bowl should
be filled unless the stop is initiated in
STARTING.

Processing in SAFETY STOP:


• Could be closed or open but the bowl shall
be filled unless the stop is initiated in
STARTING.

206 Inlet to liquid seal.


• Processing in STAND STILL:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in RUNNING:
• Supplying a liquid seal prior to opening the
feed: See 5.8.5 Operating water interface
(Purifier), page 149 or 5.8.6 Operating water
interface (Clarifier), page 150.
• Displacing (the interface) before a
discharge: See 5.8.5 Operating water
interface (Purifier), page 149 or 5.8.6
Operating water interface (Clarifier), page
150.

129
5.5 Interface description 5 Technical Reference

220 and 221 Outlets


Processing in STAND STILL:
• Could be closed or open.
Processing in other modes:
• Shall be open.

372 Inlet for discharge liquid.


Processing in STAND STILL:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:


• Shall be closed.
Processing in RUNNING:
• A discharge is initiated according to
procedure in "Operating Water Interface".
• After a discharge has been triggered the
motor current or bowl speed should be
monitored to indicate if there comes a
current peak or a sudden drop in speed. The
absence of such a signal indicates that the
discharge has failed and corrective action
should be taken (e.g. trigger a new
discharge). Absence of a discharge may
result in problems due to solidification of the
sediment.
That the current returns to original value after


discharge could also be supervised. If
current is much higher after the discharge
this might be an indication that the bowl has
not closed properly after the discharge.
For service purposes there should be a

counter to count number of discharges.

130
5 Technical Reference 5.5 Interlace description

373 Inlet for make-up liquid.


Processing in STAND STILL:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in RUNNING:
• The separator bowl is closed according to
procedure in
"Operating Water Interface".
• The separator bowl is closed in a discharge
sequence according to procedure in


"Operating Water Interface".

131
5.6 Water quality 5 Technical Reference

5.6 Water quality


AJfa Laval rei 553406, rev. 7

Quality requirements for operating water


Operating water is used in the separator for several different
functions: e.g. to operate the discharge mechanism, to lubricate
and cool mechanical seals, etc.
Poor quality of the operating water may with time cause erosion,
corrosion and/or operating problem in the separator and must
therefore be treated to meet certain demands.

The following requirements are of fundamental importance


1

2
Turbidity-free water, solids content <0,001% by volume.
Deposits must not be allowed to form in certain areas in the
separator.
Max particle size 50 1JITl.

3 Total hardness less than 180 mg CaC0 3 per litre, which
corresponds to 10 °dH or 12,5 °E.
Hard water may with time form deposits in the operating
mechanism. The precipitation rate is accelerated with increased
operating temperature and low discharge frequency. These
effects become more severe the harder the water is.
4 Chloride content max 100 ppm NaCI (equivalent to 60 mg CIII).
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on the separator surfaces in
contact with the operating water, including the spindle.
Corrosion is a process that is accelerated by increased
separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion

5
concentration.
A chloride concentration above 60 mg/I is not recommended.
pH>6
Increased acidity (lower pH) increases the risk for corrosion; this

is accelerated by increased temperature and high chloride ion
content.

[MOT£)
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences
arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating
water supplied by the customer

132
5 Technical Reference 5.7 Lubricants

5.7 Lubricants

5.7.1 Lubrication chart

• AJfa LavaJ ret 553216-01 rev. 6

1
Lubricating points
Bowl spindle ball bearings and buffers are lubricated by
Lubricants
Lubricating oil as spec~ied in 5.7.5 Recommended oil
I oil mist. brands, page 140.

2 Bowl spindle taper. Lubricating oil, only a few drops for rust protection.

3 Metal buffers of bowl spindle. Lubricating oil.

4 Bowl: Sliding contact surfaces and pressure-loaded Pastes as specified in 5.7.3 Recommended lubricants,
I surfaces such as lock rings, threads of lock rings, bowl
hood and cap nut.
page 135.

5 Rubber seal rings. Grease as specified in 5.7.3 Recommended lubricants,


I page 135.

6 Friction coupling ball bearings. The bearings are packed with grease and sealed, they
need no extra lubrication.

• 7 Electric motor. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

133
5.7 Lubricants 5 Technical Reference

5.7.2 AlIa Laval lubricating oil


groups
Alfa Laval ret 553216-01 rev. 6

• Group A oil: a high quality gear oil on paraffin base with stable AW (anti wear)
additives.
• Group B oil: a high quality gear oil on paraffin base with stable EP (extreme pressure)
additives.

• Group D oil: a synthetic base oil with additives stable at high operating temperatures.
• Group E oil: Characteristics as a group D-oil but suitable at a higher operation power
(ii5 kW)

Do not mix different oil brands or oils from different oil groups.


Always use clean vessels when handling lubricating oil.
Great attention must be paid not to contaminate the lubricating oil. Of particular
importance is to avoid mixing of different types of oil. Even a few drops of motor oil
mixed into a synthetic oil may result in severe foaming.
Any presence of black deposits in a mineral type oil is an indication that the oil base
has deteriorated seriously or that some of the oil additives have precipitated. Always
investigate why black deposits occurs.
If it is necessary to change from one group of oil brand to another it is recommended to
do this in connection with an overhaul of the separator. Clean the gear housing and
the spindle parts thoroughly and remove all deposits before filling the new oil.

[MOTE]
Always clean and dry parts (also tools) before
lubricants are applied.

Check the oil level before start. Top up when


necessary.

=
Oil volume see 5.2 Technical data, page 119.

It is of utmost importance to use the lubricants recommended in our


documentation.
This does not exclude, however, the use of other brands, provided they have
equivalently high quality properties as the brands recommended. The use of
oilbrands and other lubricants than recommended, is done on the exclusive
responsibility ofthe user or oil supplier.
Applying, handling and storing of lubricants
Always be sure to follow lubricants manufacturer's instructions.

134
5 Technical Reference 5.7 Lubricants

5.7.3 Recommended lubricants


A/fa Laval ref. 553217-01 rev. 9

Pastes for non-food applications:

~O'fi]
The data in below tables is based on supplier
information in regards to lubrication properties.
Trade names and designations might vary from
country to country, contact your local supplier for
more information.

Brands with Alfa Laval article numbers are


approved and recommended for use.

• Manufacturer Designation

Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 805 K


Gleitmo 705 K
Alfa Laval No_

Dow Coming Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-02 (1000 g)


Molykote 1000 (Paste) 535586-01 (100 g)
Molykote G-rapid plus 535586-02 (50 g)
(Paste)

Roco! Dry Moly Paste


MT-LM

Kluber Wolfracoat C (Paste)

Bonded coatings

• Manufacturer Designation

Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 900 (Varnish or


spray)
Alfa Laval No.

Dow Coming Molykote D321 R (Spray) 535586-01 (400 ml)


Molykote D321 R (Varnish)

135
5.7 Lubricants 5 Technical Reference

Pastes for hygienic applications (NSF regist


HI is preferd

Manufacturer Designation Hygienic Alfa Laval No.


I comment

Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 805 DVGW(KTW)


approval for drinking
water
rrzw prOfzeugnis)

Geralyn 2 NSF Registered H1 561764-01 (50 g)


I (3 sep 2004)

Bremer & Leguil, Rivolta F.L.A NSF Registered H1


Fuchs Lubritech (15 Feb 2003)
German §5 Absatz 1
LMBG approved

Dow Coming Molykote TP 42


Molykote D

Molykote P1900 NSF Registered H1


I (7 Jan 2004)

KIOber K10berpasle 46 MR 401 White; contains no


lead, cadmium,
nickel, sulphur nor
halogens.

KIOberpaste UH1 96-402 NSF Registered H1


I (25 Feb 2004)

Reeol Foodlube Multi Paste NSF Registered H1


I

(13 Apr2001)

136
5 Technical Reference 5.7 Lubricants

ISilicone grease for rubber rings

Manufacturer Designation Follows according Alia Laval No.


I to Manufacturer

Dow Coming Molykote 111 Conform to the FDA 539474-02 (100 g)


(Compound) regulations (21 CFR
Molykote 111 178.3570) for occasional 539474-03 (25 g)
(Compound) food contact. Certified:
National Water Council UK
and WRC, UK. Certified:
food industry as per
Chemical Testing
Laboratory Dr. Bohm,
Munich.

•I Fuchs Lubritech
Molykote Foodslip SR
grease

Chemplex 750
Former USDA H1
approved.

DVGW approved according


569415·01 (50 g)

I Bremer & Leguil Rivolta


to the German KTW-
recomendations for drinking
water.

NSF Registered H1
",

I F.L.G MD2 (15 Feb 2003)

Klilber Unisilkon L 250 L Complies with German


Environmental Agency on
hygiene requirements for
tap water. Certified by
DVGW-KTW, WRC,
AS4020, ACS.

Paraliq GTE 703 NSF Registered H1 (25 Feb

• II Bel-Ray No-Tox Silicone valve seal


2004) Complies with LMBG
and the European standard
EN 1672, part2.

NSF Registered H1
(19 June 2002)

MMCC ALC0220 NSF Registered H1


I (25 March 2002)

Rocol Foodlube Hi-Temp NSF Registered H1


I (18 April 2001)

137
5.7 Lubricants 5 Technical Reference

Greases for ball and roller bearings:

o-0T£]
Always follow the specific recommendation for
lubrication as advised by the manufacturer.

Manufacturer Designation

BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2

Castrol APS2
Spheerol EPL 2

Chevron Texaco

Dow Coming
Chevron Dura-Lnh Grease EP2
Texaco Multifak AFB 2

Molykote G-0101
Molykote Multilub

ExxonMobil Beacon EP2
Unirex N2
Mobilith SHC 460
Mobilux EP2

Fuchs Lubritech Lagermeister EP2

OB/Kuwait Petroleum Rembrandt EP2


Shell Alvania EP 2
Albida EP2

SKF LGEP2
LGMT2

Total Multis EP2

138
5 Technical Reference 5.7 Lubricants

15.7.4 Recommended lubricating oils


AIfa Laval ret. 553219-09 rev. 0

Two different groups oflubricating oils are


approved. They are designated as Alfa Laval
lubricating oil groups A and D which are
described in 5.7.2 Alfa Lavallubricating oil
I
groups, page 134.
The numerical value after the letter in the
table states the viscosity grade..

Ambient temperature AI'a Laval lubricating oil Time in operation


group
Oil change interval


between +15 and +45 ·C Al150 1500 h

between +2 and +65 ·C D/220 2000h

The corresponding commercial oil brands are


listed on next page.

• When the separator is operated for short


periods, lubricating oil must be changed
every 12 months even if the total number of
operating hours is less than stated in the
recommendations above.
• Check and prelubricate spindle bearings on
separators which have been out of service
• for 6 months or longer.
• In seasonal operation: change oil before
every operating period.
Alfa Laval do not accept responsibility for any
damage caused by the use oflubricants which
deviate from the recommended lubricants
listed in this manual.

139
5.7 Lubricants 5 Technical Reference

5.7.5 Recommended oil brands

Alfa Laval lubricating oil group A/150


Alfa Laval ref. 553218-04 rev. 3

Parrafinic mineral lubricating oil category


(ISO·L·) HM 150
Viscosity grade (ISO 344813104) VG 150.
The oil shall follow the standards below.

Standard Designation


ISO 11158, (ISO 6743/4) ISO-L-HM or HV 150

ISO 12925-1, (ISO 6743/6) ISO-L-CKC or CKC 150

DIN 51524 par12 or 3 (German standard) DIN 51524-HLP or HVLP 150

DIN 51517 par13 DIN 51517-CLP 150

The following is a list of reco=ended oil brands. Trade names and


designations might vary from country to country. Please contact your local
supplier for more information. Brands with Alfa Laval article number are
approved and reco=ended for use.

Alfa Laval lubrication oil group A

I Viscosity grade VG (ISO 344B/31 04) VG 150


Viscosity index VI (ISO 2909) >95

Manufacturer Designation

I
I
Alia Laval

BP
546098-81(4 litres)
546098-83(1 litre)

Bar1ran 150
Bar1ran HV 150

Castral AlphaZN 150

I Hyspin AWH(-M) 150

ChevronTexaco Rando HD 150

I Paper Machine Oil Premium 150

Esso/Exxon Mobil DTE oil Extra Heavy


Mobil DTE 19M
Nu10150

I OB/Kuwait Petroleum Haydn 150

140
5 Technical Reference 5.7 Lubricants

I Shell Morlina 150

I Statoil LubeWay XA 150


Total AzollaZS 150
I me ust 01 recommenaea 011 oranas are not
Elf Visga 150

complete. Other oil brands may be used as long


as they have equivalently quality as the brands
recommended. The oil shall follow the
requirements in one of the standards below.
The use of other lubricants than the
recommended is done on the exclusive
responsibility of the user or oil supplier.

• Parrafinic mineral lubricating oil category


HM 150 for hygienic applications.
Conform to U.S Food and Drug Administration
(FDA) requirements oflubricants with
incidental food contact, title CFR 21178.3570,
178.3620 and/or those generally regarded as
safe (US 21 CFR 182).

Lubricating oils for food and hygienic applications

Viscosity grade VG (ISO 3448/3104) VG 150


Viscosity index VI (ISO 2909) >95
Manufacturer Designation

• ExxonMobil
Bel-Ray
Total
Mobil DTE FM 150 (MineraVPAO)
Bel-Ray No-Tax Gear Oil 85
Keystone Nevastane EP 150

The hygienic oils on the list are all in the online


"NSF White Book ™ Listing" at the time of the
revision of this document. For more
information about the NSF registration and up
to date HI registration, see www.ns£org (http://
www.ns£org/business/nonfood_compounds/)

141
5.7 Lubricants 5 Technical Reference

Specification Synthetic lUbricating oil,


category PAO (ISO·L·I eKE 220
Viscosity grade (ISO 3448/3104) VG 220.
Alfa Laval ret 553218-08 rev. 4

D'0TE]
The following are lists of recommended oil brands.
Trade names and designations might vary from
country to country, contact your local oil supplier
for more information.
Brands with Alfa Laval article number are
approved and recommended for use.

Alfa Laval lubrication oil group D

Manufacturer

Alfa Laval

BP
Designation

542690-80
542690-81

Enersyn HTX 220


(20 litres)
(4 litres)

Enersyn EP-XF 220

Castrol Alphasyn EP 220


Alphasyn HG 220
Optigear Synthetic A 220

ChevronTexaco Texaco/CaltexPinnacle EP 220


Tegra Synthetic Gear Lubricant 220
(H2)
FAMM Pinnacle Marine Gear 220

ExxonMobil Terresstic SHP 220


Terresso SHP 220
Mobil SHC 630

08/Kuwait Petroleum Schumann 220

Shell Omala RL220

Statoil Mereta 220

Total Carter SH 220


Elf Epona SA 220

The lists of recommended oil brands are not complete. Other oil brands may be used
as long as they have equivalently quality as the brands recommended. The oil must
have the same viscosity class and ought to follow the ISO standard 12925-1,
category ISO-L-CKE (ISO 6743-6) or DIN 51517, part 3 CLP, but shall have a
synthetic base oil of polyalphaolefin type (PAO) instead of mineral base oil. The oil
must be endorsed for worm gear with brass worm wheel. The use of other lubricants
than recommended is done on the exclusive responsibility of the user or oil supplier.

142
5 Technical Reference 5.8 Drawings

5.8 Drawings

5.8.1 Foundation drawing


Alfa Laval ret. 548711, roll 2

500

1100 min. F


2500

_~1...
4 11

570
113 350

• D

A B c
A Center of separator bowl
B Center of motor Vertical force not exceeding 5 kNlfoot
C 8 holes for foundation bolt
D Foundation bolt
E Service side Horizontal force not exceeding 7 kNlfoot
F Max. height of largest component incl. lifting tool

_._____ Service area

143
5.8 Drawings 5 Technical Reference

5.8.2 Gravity disc nomogram


AIfa LavaJ ret 565796 rev. 0

-- - --- •

60 "",OC
20 30
'" 50 70 60 90
0 0,' ',5 2 ,5

OF ~
m'l h "~
0

Oil density, kg/nil at 15 0 C


Oil temperature, cC, of

The nomogram is based on the properties of


fresh water.
Gravity disc hole diameter, 4> mm
Throughput, nil/h

Example I in nomogram Example 11 in nomogram
Reference in graph: Reference in graph: •••••

Oil density 965 kglm3 Oil density 875 kglm 3


at 15°C (60 OF) at 15°C (60 OF)
Separation Separation
temperature 70 °C (158 OF) temperature 60°C (140 OF)
Throughput 1,0 m3/h Throughput 2 m3/h
From the graphs (heavy line), the correct From the graphs (broken line), the correct
gravity disc has a hole diameter of 54 mm. gravity disc has a hole diameter of 66 mm.

144
5.8 Drawings 5 Technical Reference

5.8.3 Electric motor


A/fa Laval rei 551821, rev. 5

The rotor balanced with half key.


8h9 Maximum vibration velocity 1,8 mm/s (rms) ace. to IEC
• I I•
60 298,5 34-14.
'\
47 100
'- ./ A 97

fB
67
M10 33
28j6 11
I
/\ , .....
22 . j
-fl--fi-}-- ~
-~~ "
'"<"i
-- III...
Cl\
~
--~- -- - ------------------- ------- --
...f6 ~

4
~

c

A Knock out openings for cable glands on both sides 2 x ,,23
B Sheet-steel fan hood
C 4 holes ,,15

[MOTE]
The motor bearings are permanent lubricated.

Manufacturer ABB Motors Type of mounting Degree of protection


IEC 34-7 IEC 34-5
Manufacturers drawing CAT. BAlMarine motors GB 98-05
IM 3011 IP 55
Standards IEC 34-series, 72, 79 and 85
0
Size
Type
Weight
Poles
100L
M2AA 100L
21 kg
2

Insulation class F
Bearings D-end 6306-2Z1C3, N-end 6205-
Method of cooling 2Z1C3

Specification IC 411 (IEC 34-6)


Totaly enclosed three-phase motor
for marine service3)

[MOTE]
For complete Information about motor variants, please
contact your Alia Laval representative.

146
5 Technical Reference 5.8 Drawings

5.8.4 Machine plates and safety


labels

4
7


-,,
-"
6

1 A

Location of machine plates and safety lables

1. Machine plate

• Separator
Manufacturing serial No I Year
Product No
Inlet and outlet
Bowl • •
Machine bottom part
Max. speed (bowl)
Direction of rotation (bowl)
Speed motor shaft
El. current frequency
Recommended motor power
Max. density of feed
Max. density of sediment
Process temperature min.lmax.

147
5.8 Drawings 5 Technical Reference

3. Safety label
Text on label:
WARNING
Read the instruction manuals before
installation, operation and maintenance.
Consider inspection intervals.
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead
to fatal injury.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator
and keep bowl filled with liquid during
rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse if
bowl is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any
dismantling work is started.

4. Name plate
o 0
~ -"""
cLf--1«FO'""'C'-
-:;""oI
t!cv.et:
c

o o
6. Power supply frequency

50Hz -

7. Label
60Hz

Text on label:
Read the instruction manual before lifting.
"--
!!:--
"---
"---
_0_ _

"--
!!,--

A. Space for label indicating


representative

148
5 Technical Reference 5.8 Drawings

5.8.5 Operating water interface


(Purifier)
Atfa Laval rei 565808, rev. 0

Proposed operation of operating water interface for purifier execution.


Closing the bowl and supplying liquid seal:
1 Initialise by opening connection 372 for 1 second.

2 Close the bowl by opening connection 373 for 40 seconds.

3 Supply liquid seal by opening connection 206 for 12 seconds.

4 Open the feed (connection 201).

Starting sequence illustrated graphically:

• 373
372
206
201
+----~---~----~---~---~--
o 10 20 30 40 50 60

Performing a discharge:
1 Close the feed (connection 201).

2 Open connection 373 and perform a displacement (of the interface) by opening
connection 206.


3 After 8 seconds open connection 372 during 1 second .

4 After another 12 seconds close connections 206 and 373.

5 Open the feed (connection 201).

Discharge sequence illustrated graphically:

373
372
206
201

-5 o 5 10 15 20 25 30
During the separating process the make-up
water supply volume is maintained by opening
connection 373 for 2 seconds every 15 minutes.

149
5.8 Drawings 5 Technical Reference

5.8.6 Operating water interface


(Clarifier)
A/fa Laval rei 565849, rev. 0
Proposed operation of operating water interface
for clarifier execution.
Closing the bowl:
1 Initialise by opening connection 372 for 1
second.
2 Close the bowl by opening connection 373
for 40 seconds.
3 Open the feed (connection 201).
Starting sequence illustrated graphically:

373
372

206
201 E
+--....,.------.--..,....----r--.,...---,-------,---,-
'-----_ _---=0_ _-=5_ _..:. :01 =---_..:..:15=---_=20=-----_=25=-----_..:..:30=---_..:..:35=-----_-'-40=-----_--'-4..:..:5_------'~
Performing a discharge:
1 Close the feed (connection 201).
2 Open connection 373.
3 After 12 seconds open connection 372
during 1 second.
4

5
After another 15 seconds close connection
373.

Open the feed (connection 201).


Discharge sequence illustrated graphically:

373
372
206
201
• ;;
-5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 ~
During the separating process the make-up
water supply volume is maintained by opening
connection 373 for 2 seconds every 15 minutes.

150
5 Technical Reference 5.8 Drawings

5.8.7 Performance data,


in- and outlet device
Affa Laval ret. 565805. rev. 0

Maximum light phase counter pressure as a


function of throughput and viscosity:

A
400
Du 47
350

-----
300

• 250

200
~ - -- ----
. ... ..
' ... ... ...
. ..
. .. '" .
. . ..
I--

....
........
r---.-.. .....
.... .... .............
..
150 ... . ..
. ~

100

50

o
o 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4
B
A. Max. fight phase counter pressure, kPa
B. Light phase throughput, m3 /h

• WeSt

30 eSt

48 eSt

151
5.8 Drawings 5 Technical Reference

Inlet pressure as a function of throughput


and viscosity

A
180

160 A.

140
/

120
/
/
100 /

80 V
/
/
60

40
20
~
/
V •
o
-20 °LI °...JIL5_ _----'-1 1L\5_ _---'~L__ _2.J..15 3LI 3.. JIL5_ _----l1
B
A. Pressure kPa
B. Throughput m3 /h

152
5 Technical Reference 5.8 Drawings

Maximum heavy capacity as a function of


gravity disc:

A
160..------------------------,

140

120

100

80

60

• 40

20

0
73 66 61 50,5
B
A. /itres/hour
B. Gravity disc

153
5.8 Drawings 5 Technical Reference

5.8.8 Power consumption


Alia Laval ret 565793, rev. 0

Power consumption as a function of


throughput and light phase counter
pressure, 10 cSt:

kW
3-r---,----,------r-----r-----,-----,r----r-------,

2,5[=r=:l~EE£:r2=J
-- - --''''-
1 _ _ - -

- -- - ..


2
...1--- ......... .......
.. . ..
10---- ..

1,5 -1----1---.+-.~.
. . .
,.....,.:=-----1----1---+---+----1-------l
. .. ...
1t------1f---t----t----+---+---+---+-------i

0,5 t------1f---t----t----+---+---+---+-------i

O+-------i'-----+---+---+---+----+---+-----l
o 0,5 1 1,5 2 3 3,5
m'th
4 2,5

Max.
150 kPa

Min.

154
5 Technical Reference 5.8 Drawings

Power consumption as a function of


throughput and light phase counter pressure,
30 cSt:

kW
3,-----.------,------,----.------,----,-----,

2,5 r-C=r==E:=f~:r::::=Jrl
...
----- -~---
2
---
...... , ~--
+------j---:::;;:I-_-""'--=---+---+__---:-:-:r.--~."-'.c::.-+__--___i
~.--

. . . . . .. ..
.. ......
...
1,5 +---+-----:t.,......,..:...
... ..-.---J---+-----t-----+------j
... .. ,
• l+---+----+-----J---+-----t-----+------j

0,5 +---+----+-----J---+-----t-----+------j

0+------+----J--------1----I------1-----J.-------l
o 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5
m'th

Max.

150 kPa
Min.

155
5.8 Drawings 5 Technical Reference

Power consumption as a function of


throughput and light phase counter pressure,
48 eSt:

kW
2,5,-----,----,.------,-----,-------,

--_ .. --- ---


..... -- -
2 +-----+----::::::-;......-t--==-:::..:......--+-----+-----I

... ...
.. ,
. . . . .. ...
..
'
1,5 t - - - - - t - - - - - - - - .:.:r.•.....-..''''----/-------/---------l
.' .
.. .. . . . '

1+------+----+------t----+--------l

0,5 +------+----+------t----+--------l

o+------I------I------I------.+-------l
0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5
°
Max.

150 kPa
Min.

5.8.9 Interconnection diagram


AIfa Laval rei 561723, rev. 0

1
2 Reset Coil 0
3 NO
4
5
6
7
Common
NC

Heater
eb1cfcUQ
8 @)
Vibration sensor (mechanical switch)

156
5 Technical Reference 5.9 Storage and installation

5.9 Storage and


installation

5.9.1 Introduction
These installation specifications are valid
for the S 300 separator.

The installation instructions are specifications,


which are compulsory requirements.
Any specific requirements from classification
societies or other local authorities must he
followed.

• [MOTE]
If the specifications are not followed, Alfa Laval can
not be held responsible for any malfunctions related
to the installation.

157
5. 10 Protection and storage of goods 5 Technical Reference

5.10 Protection and


storage of goods

a The separator must be stored indoors at 5 -


55 'C, if not delivered in a water-resistant
box, designated for outdoor storage.

[-===]

The following protection products are b If there is a risk for water condensation, the
recommended: equipment must stand well ventilated and at
1 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 112 or equivalent) with long a temperature above dew point.
lasting effective treatment for external surfaces.
The oil should prevent corrosion attacks and
leaves a waxy surface.
2 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) is a thin
lubricant for inside protection. It gives a
lubricating transparent oil film.
3 Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-rust c If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the
oil after the storage period. equipment must be inspected every 6
4 Moist remover to be packed together with the months and, if necessary, the protection be


separator equipment. renewed.

158
5 Technical Reference 5.10 Protection and storage of goods

5.10.1 Storage at out of operation


If the separator is out of operation for more
than 1 month:
1 Lift out the bowl.
2 Protect the spindle taper from corrosion by
lubricating it with oil.
3 Keep the separator and bowl well stored, dry
and protected from mechanical damage.
For details see 5.10 Protection and storage of
I
goods, page 158

• 5.10.2 Before start-up


If the separator has been out of operation for:

1 months or longer
• Pre-Iubricate the spindle bearings.

6 months or longer
• Perform an Inspection service. and make
sure to pre-Iubricate the spindle bearings.
• Change the oil before starting.

18 months or longer
• Perform an Overhaul service El:t and make

• •
sure to pre-Iubricate the spindle bearings.
Change the oil before starting.

159
5.10 Protection and storage of goods 5 Technical Reference

5.10.3 Connections to surrounding


equipment

Local safety regulations


If the local safety regulations prescribe that the SAFETY
installation has to be inspected and approved by REGULATIONS
responsible authorities before the plant is put
into service, consult with such authorities before
installing the equipment and have the projected
plant design approved by them.

Service media
Ensure that all service media (electric power, ~


t: c L
operating and safety liquids etc.) required for the
separator have the correct quality and capacity. SEPARATOR
SERVICE
MANUAL

Sludge discharge tank


If the sediment from the separator is discharged
into a tank, this tank must be sufficiently
ventilated. The connection between the
separator and the tank must be of the size and
~ II !,
! i IT
__________U__________________ ___ ________
----------- ---- - ------------- ---- --- -------_.
configuration specified.
If the solids are discharged from the separator ,=
'= ?
bowl casing into a closed system, ensure that
this system cannot be overfilled or closed in such
a way that the solids cannot leave the bowl
casing. This could cause a hazardous situation.
i;;:

~~

160
5 Technical Reference 5.10 Protection and storage of goods

Valves, Pipes and Similar Equipment


• Components like valves need to be cleaned
with solvent and treated with anti-rust oil
(type 112).
• Water pipes should be drained and treated
with anti-rust oil (type 112).
• Articles made of rubber or plastics
(e.g. seals) must not be treated with anti-rust
oil.

5.10.4 Reassembly and Start up


• Clean away the anti-rust oil with white spirit.
• • Remove the silica gel bags from all units.
• Follow all relevant instructions in the Service
Manual and Operating Instructions.

5.10.55torage and transport of


goods

Storage

• Specification
Upon arrival to the store, check all
components and keep them:
1 Well stored and protected from mechanical
damage.
2 Dry an protected from rain and humidity.
3 Organized in the store in such a way that the
goods will be easily accessible when
installation is about to take place.

161
5. 10 Protection and storage of goods 5 Technical Reference

A separator can be delivered with different


types of protection:
• Fixed on a pallet.

The separator must be stored in a dry storage


room, protected from rain and humidity. It
must be well protected from mechanical
damage.


Fixed on a pallet

• In a wooden box which is not water tight.

~
" I"""
" ~--...&-----
The separator must be stored in a dry storage (~
~
room, protected from rain and humidity.
/'
<....r.--:>.:>~
J. / I
1 '--

~
~

::..-.lID

t." ~ §~
~ ~ ~
tn a wooden box which is not water tight

• In a special water-resistant box for outdoor


storage.

The separator and its parts have been treated


with an anti-corrosion agent. Once the box
has been opened, store dry and protected
""\;-------1


from rain and humidity.
The packaging for outdoor storage is only to
special order.

."
~
In a special water-resistant box for outdoor storage

162
5 Technical Reference 5.10 Protection and storage of goods

Transport

Specification
• During transport of the separator, the bowl
must always be removed from the machine
and transported separately.
• When lifting a separator it must always be
hung securely. See details in chapter 3.6
Lifting instructions, page 52. l
\

Crush hazard
J

Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.

• During erection, all inlets and outlets to


separators and accessories must be
covered to be protected from dust and dirt.

H = minimum 750 mm

163
5.10 Protection and storage of goods 5 Technical Reference

5.10.6Planning of installation

Introduction
The space required for one or more separators
can be calculated by consulting 5.4 Basic size
I
drawing, page 122, and instructions for
ancillary equipment, electrical and electronic
equipment and cables.

Check the drawings when planning the installation


Important measurements
Important measurements are the minimum
lifting height for lifting tackle, shortest
distance between driving motor and wall, free
,I


passage for dismantling and assembly,
maintenance and operation.
Plan your installation with sufficient room for
the controls and operation so that instruments
are easily visible. Valves and controls must be Suitable space must be obtained for the maintenance
within convenient reach. Pay attention to space work
requirements for maintenance work, work
benches, dismantled machine parts or for a
service trolley.

Space for separator


The separator shall be placed in such a way
that suitable space for maintenance and repair
is obtained.
Specification
I See the 5.8.1 Foundation drawing, page 143 for

the service space required with the separator
installed.
Recommendation
The spanner for the bowl hood should have
sufficient space to make a complete turn
without touching any ofthe ancillary
equipment surrounding the separator.

164
5 Technical Reference 5.10 Protection and storage of goods

Lifting height for transport of bowl

Specification
A minimum height is required to lift the bowl,
bowl parts and the bowl spindle, see the
I drawing 5.8.1 Foundation drawing, page 143.
Recommendation
When two or more separators are installed, the
lifting height may have to be increased to
enable parts from one separator to be lifted and
moved over an adjoining assembled separator.

Space for oil changing


Specification
The oil filling device must not be blocked by
floor plate arrangement, etc.
Recommendation
It should be possible to place a portable
collecting tray under the oil filling device drain
hole.

165
5.10 Protection and storage of goods 5 Technical Reference

5.10.7Foundations

[MO't£J
When lifting a separator it must always be hung
securely. see separate lifting Instructions In this
book.

I- See 5.8.1 Foundation drawing, page 143.


- The separator must be installed on a strong
and rigid foundation to reduce the influence
of vibrations from adjacent machinery.
- The foundation should be provided with a
cofferdam.
- Fit the separator frame on the foundation as
follows:
- Check that the bolts do not press against
the edges of the holes, otherwise the

elasticity of the mounting of the separator
frame will be impeded.
- Fit height adjusting washers required.
- Check that the separator frame is
horizontal and that all feet rest on the
foundation.
- Tighten the screws.

166
SEPARATOR MANUAL 6 OPERATING

6 Operating

Contents

6.1 Operating routine 168

6.2 Before first Start 168


6.2.1 Selection of gravity disc 169

6.3 Start after a service 170


6.3.1 Before normal start 170
6.3.2 Starting and running-up procedure 173

• 6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
Separation
Stopping procedure
Safety stop
174
175
176

6.4 After Safety Stop 177

577461-02 167
6. 1 Operating routine 6 Operating

6.1 Operating routine


These operating instructions describe routine
procedures to follow before and during the
start, running and stopping sequences of the
separator.
If system documentation is available always
follow the operating instructions ofthis. If
there is no system documentation the
instructions below are to be followed.

6.2 Before first Start


Technical demands for connections and logical
limitations for separator are listed in chapter
"Technical Reference" on page 117.
Ensure that the separator is correctly installed and
that feed lines and drains have been flushed clean.

Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before start. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and properly
tightened. Non compliance may lead to breakdown.

Electrical hazard
Follow local regUlations for electrical installation and
earthing (grounding). •
Breakdown hazard
Check that the power frequency Is in agreement with the
machine plate. If incorrect, reSUlting overspeed may cause
breakdown.

50 Hz?
60Hz?

Use the separation system for the purpose, and within the
limits, specified by Alfa Laval. Failure to do so could cause a
violent breakdown.

168
6 Operating 6.2 Before first Start

2 Check the oil sump level.Top up if necessary.

• The oil level should be slightly above middle


of the sight glass.

[M()1'£]
Too much or too little oil can damage the separator
bearings.


6.2.1 Selection of gravity disc
The separator is delivered with a set of gravity
discs with different diameters for purification
operation. The hole diameter of the gravity disc
sets the position of the oil/water interface in the
separator, see page 20. The separation
efficiency can be optimized by selection of the
correct diameter for each oil quality.
As a guide the 5.8.2 Gravity disc nomogram,
page 144 can be used. The size of the first
gravity disc to be tried can be read directly
• from the nomogram.
The best separation results are obtained by
using a gravity disc with as large size as
possible, which will not cause a broken water
seal in the bowl or an emulsification in the
water outlet.
The presence of salt water in the oil may
demand the use of a gravity disc with bigger
hole than indicated in the nomogram. The
nomogram is based on the properties of fresh
water in the oil.
For operating the separator as a clarifier the
diameter of the disc should be 40 mm.

169
6.3 Start after a service 6 Operating

6.3 Start after a service


Pay special attention to unusual conditions
when starting the separator after a service.

6.3.1 Before normal start


Check these points before every start.
1. Make sure that the bowl is clean and that
the separator is properly assembled.
2. Make sure that the bolts of the outlet cover
and the frame hood are fully tightened.


'-----_ __ _ ' = ' ~ !
__'='~__J

Check assembly and tightenings

3. Make sure that all couplings and


connections are securely tightened to
prevent leakage.

Slip hazard
Check all connections for leakage.
6
Check for leakages (not admitted)

Oil leakage may make the floor slippery.

4. Make sure that the inlet pipe is tightened.

170
6 Operating 6.3 Start after a service

5. Read the oil level. The line in the middle of


the sight glass shows the minimum level.
Refill if necessary.
For grade and quality of oil see 5.7
Lubricants, page 133.
B
'="'

~
Check the oil level

Rotation Direction

Check the rotation of the bowl by doing a quick


start/stop. The motor fan must rotate in a clockwise

• direction .

If power cable polarity has been reversed, the


separator will rotate in reverse, and vital rotating
parts can loosen.

• Disintegration hazards
After change of feed the sludge discharge interval
must be adjusted.
Too long intervals between discharges can result in
breakdown.

171
6.3 Start after a service 6 Operating

Bum hazard
Avoid contact with hot surfaces. Process pipes,
various machine surfaces, and processed liquid can
be hot and cause burns.

172
6 Operating 6.3 Start after a service

6.3.2 Starting and running-up


procedure
1. Open the water supply valve(s). Make sure
that the water supply is on 150-600 kPa
(1,5-6 bar).

2. Start the separator.


'---- -=- -'1
Water supply
3. Be alert for unusual noises and conditions.
4. Note the normal occurrence of critical
speed periods. Some vibrations occur for
short periods during the starting cycle,


when the separator passes through its
critical speeds. This is normal and passes
over without danger. Try to learn the
vibration characteristics of the critical
speed pattern.

Disintegration hazards
When excessive vibrallon occurs, keep bowl filled
and stop separator.
The cause of the vibration must be identified and
rectified before the separator is restarted.
Excessive vibration may be due to incorrect
assembly or insufficient cleaning of the bowl.

173
6.3 Start after a service 6 Operating

5. Check the current to the separator motor to


ensure that the separator has reached full
speed:
During start, the current reaches a peak and
then slowly drops to a low and stable value.
For normal length of the start-up period see
5.2 Technical data, page 119.
Current increases during start...

6. For purification:
a. Supply water to form the water-seal.
The water should have the same
temperature as the process liquid.
b. Close the water feed when water flows

7.
c.
out through the water outlet.
Start the oil feed slowly to avoid
breaking the water seal.
For clarification:
... to decrease to a stable value when full speed has
been reached •
a. Start the oil feed with full flow.
8. For both purification and clarification
modes:
Check the separator inlet and outlet
pressures. See recommended values in your
system documentation.
9. Adjust to desired throughput.


6.3.3 Separation
Do regular checks on:
• oil inlet temperature (if applicable)
• water collecting tank level (if applicable)
• sound/vibration of the separator
• back pressure
• motor current.

174
6 Operating 6.3 Start after a service

6.3.4 Stopping procedure


1. Turn off the oil feed.
2. Feed displacement water until water flows
out through the water outlet. Then close
this feed.
3. Stop the separator.
4. Wait until the separator has come to a
complete standstill.
Remove the safety device and look through
the slot in the frame hood to see the
movement of the bowl.

• Separator standstill

Dismantling work must not be started before all


rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill.

Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any dismantling
work.

175
6.3 Start after a service 6 Operating

6.3.5 Safety stop

If the separator begins to vibrate excessively


during operation, stop it immediately by
pushing the safety stop. The separator motor
is switched off.
• Keep the bowl filled during the run-down
to minimize the excessive vibration.
Evacuate the room. The separator may be
hazardous when passing its critical speeds
during the run-down. Hazard!

Disintegration hazards
Never discharge a vibrating separator.

L- ----'I
Push the safety stop!

176
6 Operating 6.4 After Safety Stop

6.4 After Safety Stop

Separator standstill

Dismantling work must not be started before all


rotating parts have come to a complete
standstill.

Entrapment hazard
Make sure that rotating parts have come to a
complete standstill before starting any dismantling

• work.

Avoid accidental start

Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock power
supply before starting any dismantling work.
Make sure that separator has come to a complete
standstill before starting any dismantling work


Remedy the cause

The cause of the emergency must be remedied


before attempting to restart the separator.
If the cause is not found, an overhaul must be
performed on the separator, and all moving parts
thoroughly checked

Disintegration hazard
Do not start the separator after an emergency stop
without first remedying the cause of the emergency.
Make sure that the bowl Is clean before restart.

177
6.4 After Safety Stop 6 Operating

Separator reassembled

The separator must be fully reassembled with all


covers and guards in place and tightened before
unlocking the power supply and starting the
system.

Breakdown hazard
Assemble the separator completely before restart. All
couplings, covers, and guards must be in place and
properly tightened. Non compliance may lead to
breakdown.

178
SA/PA Separation System
Service Manual

Printed Nov 2006


Book No. 577190-02 V3

Alfa Laval reserves the right to make changes at any time without
prior notice.
Any comments regarding possible errors and omissions or
suggestions for improvement of this publication would be

gratefully appreciated.
Copies of this publication can be ordered from your local
Alfa Laval company.
Published by: Alia Laval Tumba AB
Marine & Diesel Equipment
SE - 14780 Tumba
Sweden
© Copyright Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2006.
Contents

1 Change of Circuit Board 5


1.1 Circuit Board Temperatures 7

2 Cleaning in Place (SA only) 9


2.1 Cleaning in Place, Separator 9
2.2 Cleaning in Place, Heatpac® CBM Heater 10
2.3 Cleaning in Place, Separator and Heater 12

577190-02
SNPA SEPARATION SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL 1 CHANGE OF CIRCUIT BOARD

1 Change of Circuit Board


If a circuit board has to be changed, proceed as
follows:
Note down the run time (days only) as shown in
the function list of the EPC 50.
Change the board according to the instructions
below.
Go to parameter Fa 90, and insert the run time.

OP·Board
• Switch power off.
• • Remove the snap-in transparent cover.

• Disconnect the two cable plugs (do not


remove the cables from the plugs).

• Disconnect the f1atcable connector at the top.


• Unscrew the five hexagon nuts.
• Mount the new board, and connect in reverse
order.

I/O·Board
• Switch power off.
If there is no optional board installed:

• •


Disconnect all the cable plugs on the large
board (do not remove the cables from the
plugs).

Unscrew the hexagon nuts. Take care to note


where the special nuts for optional board(s)
are located.

• Mount the new board, and connect in reverse


order.

577190-02 5
1 CHANGE OF CIRCUIT BOARO SNPA SEPARATION SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL

If one or more optional board is installed:


• Switch power off.
• Disconnect the cable plug(s) on the optional
board (do not remove the cables from the
plug(s)).
• Disconnect the flatcable connector at the top.
• Unscrew the three hexagon nuts.
• Note the position of the board and remove the
board.
• Disconnect all the cable plugs on the large
board (do not remove the cables from the
plugs).


• Unscrew the hexagon nuts. Take care to note
where the special nuts for optional board(s)
are located.
• Mount the new board in the same position as
the old, and connect in reverse order.

6 577190-02
SNPA SEPARATION SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL 1 CHANGE OF CIRCUIT BOARD

1.1 Circuit Board


Temperatures
Circuit board temperature information can be
read as follows:
• Set Pr 7 = 2.
• Push' +' and '-' at the same time ('Stands!.'
now shows on the display).

• Push '-'
The actual temperature, max. temperature, and
the number of times the temperature has been
above 70°C for the transducer scrolls across the
display.

• •


For further circuit board temperatures, push
the '-' button.

To leave the list push the '+' and the '-' buttons
at the same time.

• Reset Pr 7 = O.

577190-02 7
SNPA SEPARATION SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL 2 CLEANING IN PLACE (SA ONLY)

2 Cleaning in Place (SA only)


The use of Cleaning In Place (CIP)
equipment is recommended for best
separation results. For further information
concerning the CIP equipment, see the CIP
booklet, bookno. 1817261.

Before connecting the CIP equipment to the


Separation Unit, the switch on the control
cabinet must be turned to the CIP position.
This is so that oil is not accidentally pumped
when the pipeline is opened up.

• 2.1

1
Cleaning in Place,
Separator
Remove the pipe connecting plate with pipes
from the separator.
2 Attach the GIP eqUipment as shown in the
illustration.

The top outlet on the CIP unit should be connected to


the top inlet on the separator.
The middle inlet on the CIP unit should be connected
to the middle oil outlet on the separator.
The lower CIP inlet should be connected to the lower


water outlet on the separator.

577190-02 9
2 CLEANING IN PLACE (SA ONLY) SPJPA SEPARATION SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL

2.2 Cleaning in Place,


Heatpac® CBM Heater
For systems including a Heatpac® CBM heater,
cleaning in place of the heater should be carried
out circa every 6 months, or according to
experience. Cleaning in place of the heater
should also be carried out in the event of a
pressure drop jncrease greater than 0.3 - 0.5 bar
(which indicates that the heater is beginning to
clog).
We recommend that you use Alfa Laval cleaning
liquids. These are specially suitable for the
materials used in the Heatpac® CBM heater.
Liquids that are corrosive to copper or stainless
steel, for example hydrochloric acid, phosphoric
acid, or nitric acid, must not be used.

Bum hazard
Shut off the oil flow and the heating medium flow
before starling maintenance work.

Corrosion hazard
Pay strict attention to the safety instructions for the


cleaning liquid used.

[N01'E]
Use only specified cleaning liquids. Other cleaning
agents may corrode the metal surfaces.

10 577190-02
SNPA SEPARATION SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL 2 CLEANING IN PLACE (SA ONLY)

Proceed as follows:

1 Close the valves before and after the heater.


2 Open the heater drain valve until oil remaining
in the heater has drained.
3 Close the drain valve.
4 Loosen the turnable connections before and
after the heater. Turn the connections 90 0 so
that the special CIP connections can be
connected.
S Connect the CIP equipment. The top inlet on
the CIP unit should be connected to the oil
outlet on the heater. The hose from the heater
inlet should be inserted into the tank and

'. secured with the help of the cover.

[MOTE)
The middle and lower CIP unit outlets must be
closed.

6 Clean with CIP fluid.


7 Flush with water.

After cleaning:
1 Open the heater drain valve until the flushing


water has drained .
2 Close the drain valve.
3 Remove the CIP connections.
4 Return the turnable connections to their
former positions and re-tighten.
S Re-open the valves before and after the
heater.

577190-02 11
2 CLEANING IN PLACE (SA ONLY) SNPA SEPARATION SYSTEM SERVICE MANUAL

2.3 Cleaning in Place,


Separator and Heater

Connect the CIP equipment as shown in the


illustration. Proceed with cleaning as described
above.

12 577190-02
Spare parts catalogue, Reservdelskatalog, Ersatzteilkatalog, Catalogue de pieces de rechange, Varaosaluettelo,
Catalogue de piezas de recambio, KaTanor aanaCHblX YaCTe~, Catalogo parti di ricambio, Reservedelskatalog,
Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes, KamAoyoa aVmMaKTlKWV, Reserveonderdelen-catalogus

Specification No. 881100-04-0211


Book No. 577466 02 Rev. 5

Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE·147 80 Tumba, Sweden

Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46853031040

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2008-09-15


This publication or any part there of may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 6
1.2 Translation list 9

2 Machine bottom part 12


2.1 Oil filling device 14
2.2 Brake 16


3 Separator bowl 18

4 Inlet and outlet device 20

5 Motor mounting assembly, 50/60


Hz 22
5.1 Friction coupling, 50/60 Hz 24
5.2 Belt tightener 26

6 Motor mounting assembly, NEMA


standard 28
6.1 Friction coupling, NEMA standard 30

• 7

8
Set of plates

Gravity disc for clarification


32

34

9 Vibration monitoring unit 36

10 Set of tools 38

11 Interlocking switch 40

12 Intermediate service kit 42

13 Major service kit 44

3
14 3-years service kit 46

15 Tool box 48

16 Cross reference list 50

4
1 Read this first

1 Read this first

-
---
--

• --
Check the machine unit number on the name-plate before using this catalogue
G
o Kontrollera maskinenhetens nummer pi'! maskinskylten innan du anvander katalogen

Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer


~
La plaque de la machine, un guide pour trouver le numero de piece de rechange correct
CD
La placa-marca de la maquina - guia del numero correcto del repuesto
G
• G
OD
et>I-lpMeHHa~ Ta6Jll-l'lKa MaUJI-lHbl - YKa3aTeJlb npaBI-lJlHoro HOMepa

La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi


3anacHo~ 'laCTI-l

o La placa do fabricante da maquina - um guia do numero correto das partes sobressalentes

o Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon

o H TT1vaKilia Till;; IJllxav~1;; EivOl 0 olilly61;; TOU aWaTou aVTaMaKTIKou

Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer


GO
~
Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer

5
P 615

1.1 General information

Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine


Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of a separator equipped with non-original spare parts.
We guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.

G
Folj ditt kvalitetstankande genom att endast anvanda Alfa Laval
originalreservdelar.
Kom ihag att Alfa Laval inte tar nagot ansvar for fel pa en
separator, som innehaller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar
kvaliteten och driftsakerheten endast hos vara egna produkter.

G
Aus ROcksicht auf Ihr Bestreben um beste Qualitat sollten Sie
nur Alfa Laval Originalersatzteile benutzen.

Vergessen Sie nicht, Alfa Laval kann keine Verantwortung fOr
das Versagen eines Separators Obernehmen, der nicht mit
Originalersatzteilen versehen ist. Wir garantieren Qualitat und
Zuverlassigkeit unserer Produkte.

o
Preservez la qualite de vos equipments en n'employant que des
pieces de rechange Alfa Lava!.
N'oubliez pas q'Alfa Laval decline toute responsabilite en cas
de panne d'un separateur non equipe de pieces de rechange
d'origine. Nous garantissons la qualite et la fiabilite de nos
produits.

G
Mantenga su compromiso con la calidad, al usar siempre piezas
de repuesto Alfa Laval autenticas.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta responsabilidad por el

fallo de una separadora equipada con piezas de repuesto no
originales. Garantizamos la calidad y fiabilidad de nuestros
productos.

6
1.1 General information 1 Read this first

rapaHHlpyiiiTe Hap,elKHOCTb Ka4eCTBa BCerAa IiICnOflb3YH


nOAflIilHHble 3anaCHble 4aCTIiI Q:JIilPMbl Alfa Lava!.
3anoMHIiITe. 4TO Alfa Laval He HeceT OTBeTCTBeHHOCTIiI 3a
nOBpelKAeHlile cenapaTopa. OCHaLl.\eHHOrO HenOAflIilHHblMIiI
3an4aCTaMIiI. Mbl rapaHTlilpyeM Ka4eCTbO IiI Hap,elKHOCTb HaLUIiIX
IilJAeflliliii.

OD
Salvaguardate la vostra garanzia di qualita facendo sempre uso
di parti di ricambio Alfa Laval autentiche.
Tenete presente che la Alfa Laval non PUQ accettare
responsabilita per avaria ad un separatore attrezzato con parti
di ricambio non originali. Noi garantiamo la qualita I'affidabilita

• dei nostri prodotti.

o
Proteja 0 seu cometimento a qualidade usando sempre peyas
sobressalentes genuinas Alfa Laval.
Nao esque~a que Alfa Laval nao aceita responsabilidade por
falha de uma separadora equipada com peyas sobressalentes
nao genuinas. Nos garantimos a qualidade e a confianya dos
nossos produtos.

o
Varmistakaa vastuunne laadusta kaytlamalla aina alkuperaisia
Alfa Laval varaosia.
Muistakaa, Alfa Laval ei voi hyvaksya vastuuta ei-alkuperasilla
varaosilla varustetun separaattorin vaurioista. Me takaamme
tuotteidemme laadun ja kaytl6varmuuden.

o
• E~aO(pahioTE UllHlhl) TTOlorrlTO XPIlOl~oTTolwvrae; IJOVO yvr'lOla
avraMaKTIKO Tile; Alfa Laval.
'EXErE UTT04'IlV OTI 11 Alfa Laval OEV avahalJl30vEI Ka~IJIO w9tJVIl
Via I3MI3Ee; l3ouTupOlJllxavl)e;. OTIlV oTToia EXOUV E<papIJOOTEi IJI)
yvl)OIa avraMaKTlKo. EyyuolJaOTE TTOIOTIlTO Kal Kahl) hEITouPvia
~ovo Via TO OIKO ~ae; TTpo'iovra.

7
P 615

Streef naar een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik


uitsluitend originele Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen. Streef naar
een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik uitsluitend originele
Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen.
Vergeet niet dat Alfa Laval niet verantwoordelijk is voor een
defecte separator die niet-originele onderdelen beva!. Wij
garanderen de kwaliteit en betrouwbaarheid van onze eigen
produkten.

~
Hold Dem til den kvalitet, De har valgt at satse pa, ved altid at
anvende regte Alfa Laval reservedele.
Husk, at Alfa Laval ikke kan patage sig noget ansvar for fejl
pa en separator, som indeholder uoriginale dele. Vi kan kun
garantere kvalitet og driftsikkerhed pa vore egne produkter.

8
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first

1.2 Translation list

Oversattningslista
Obersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones

Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numero de piece Pieza No.

Antal Anzahl Quantite Cantidad


Benamning Bezeichnung Denomination Descripci6n

Anmarkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas

Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine TIpo de maquina

Produktnr Produktnummer Numero de produit Numero de producto

Maskinblocksbensmning Bezeichnung des Dlmomination de partie Descripci6n de secci6n de


Maschinenblocks de machine la maquina

Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nO No. de secci6n de


maquina

Denomination de Descripci6n de
sous-ensemble subconjunto

N° de sous-ensemble Numero de subconjunto

Voir page Vease la pagina

Ref. de fig. Referenda de figura

Nom du produit Nombre del producto

Utbyte nOdvsndiggOr Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el


ornbalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der neeessite le reequilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trammel du bel
Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste separ e des Vease la Iista de piezas
Ersatzteilliste pieces de rechange separada

Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livre comma piece de No se entrega coma plaza
reservdal geliefert rechange de recambio

9
P 615

CnOBapb nepeB,Qa
Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradu~ao
Kaannosluttelo

Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero

Kon-BO Quantita Quantidade Lukumaa.ra.

Descrizione Descricao Nimitys

Note Notas Huomautuksia

MaWYlHa THna

ApnlKYI1 N2

HaHMeHoeaHHe 6noKa
Tipo macchina

Nr.produtto

Oescrizione unita
Tipo de maquina

No. do produto

Descricao da unidade da
Konetyyppi

Tuotteen no

Koneenosan nimitys

MaWIIIHbI macchina maquina

6nOK MaWIo1Hbl N!2 Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no


maquina

HaillMeHoeaHlile rpynnbl Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhman nimitys

rpynna Ng Nr. sottogruppo Numero de subconjunto Alaryhman no

Vedi pagina Vease la pagina Ks sivu

CCblnKa Ha 3Cla13 Rif. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviite

HalilMeHoeaHlIle apnll<yna Nome prodotto

3aMeHa Tpe6yeT
6anaHcIo1poBKIo1 6apa6aHa
La sostituzione comporta
la iequilibratura del
tamburo
Nombre del producto

El racmbio requiere el
reequilibrado del rotor
Tuotteen nimi

Vaihdettaessa kuula
tasapainoitettava
uudelleen

CM. oTAenbHblail nep~eHb Vedi lista separata delle Vease la lista de piezas Katso erillista
3anaCHblX ~aCTeail parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa

He nOCTaaneHa BMeCTe c Non fomito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
3anaCHblMIo1 "laCTRMiII ricambio de recambio

10
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first

rAOUAPI
Vertaallijst
Oversaettelseliste

Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer

Iuvo.. .o Hoeveelheid Antal

Beschrijving Betegnelse

napCITIlP~a£l(; Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger

• TUnoC; ~~xav~~aroc;

Ap191..l6~ TTpo"i6VTOC;

nEPlYpacp~ aUVKpoT~lJaTOC;
Machinetype

Produktnr.

Machineblokbenaming
Maskintype

Produktnr.

Maskinbetegnelse
~~xov~C;

ApIBIJ6C; crUVKPOT~l..laTO<; Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.


~~xov~C;

nEplVpacp~ lJTTOOUVKPOT~JJaTOC; Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse

Aple~6~ UTTOOUV,pOT~~aro~ Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.

BArnE oEA115o Zie blz. Se side

nOparrOI.lTT~ OE EIK6va Afb. ref. Figumenvisning

• OvolJoala rrpo16vroC;

AVTaMay~ anQIT!!
rnavappuBl..llOTI looppoTTlac;
TOU TUI..lTTOVOU
Produktnaam

Vervangning vereist
herbalanceren van de kogel

Vervangning vereist van de


Produktnavn

Udskriftning kraever
afbalcering af kuglen

BMTTE Ell:iIKri ,\fOTa Se spaat reservedelsliste


avrOMOKTIKWV kogel

l1EV TTapall!llETol wC; Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som reservedel
avraMoKTIK:6 reserveonderdeel

11
P 615

2 Machine bottom part


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
565390-
Ref Part No Descri tion -01 Notes
Quantity
1 548010 03 Frame bottom part
2 545892 01 Frame foot
37T 223107 35 Sprin9 Wa$h&f~
M/;4... ~ 22104g,2li SCu;tW'm,,,tA::."l
5 223412 38 0-rin9 '
6 54801,2 02 Frame interme9.i.C!te part
X'1" 54815203 Wa$her" '" ,'7 '
•..8. 22104,0,,05 Scr:ew
9 54361980 Rubber buffer
10 56075701 Bowl $pindle
=1'1'- 548051' 06 Ball bearing
12,).)' 376151\1;" B@I bearing,Jk,
13 545601 80 Oil pump
14 22361007 Flat key
15-" 2234ll311; 0-rin9 '


16 560"!:63 01 Belt pulley
'17 54559701 Win9
18 560767 80 Pump sleeve
11!hH 543609 02 Ball bearln9 h"laer
'2Qji'k =,223542.46 SnJ'lPllngJ&ii'~
21 545620 02 Buffer holder
22 544203 02 Fan
23 54361201 Ga$ket ."
,2'1 543613,Q2 Top bearing cOver
25 22103502 Screw
26 544337 02 Deflector
li1& 22340629 O-ring
il,2Sl .,73647,; ,Sea) ring
29 223412 49 0-rin9
30 566279 01 Frame top part
3'1 548152tr3 Wa$her '
,,3,2 22104005 Screw ..~*-'-
33 543662 02 Ga$ket
34 543545 01 Screen
'35 260244 0;· Screw
,=.9.t3~i~';" 2~~.»~_:'p,.ril'lg" M'="*-"
37 546057 02 Cap nut
38 560985 80 Water container
'39 221040 41 Screw
40 545831 80 Oil fillin9 device
41 548046 80 Brake
42 5481,52.03 Wa$her
43 221040;llS Screw_


:h44,L 5,26~7iiQ6 R!!ducin9 h~l\'l9~ ripple,. ±z;[C.
45 543953 05 Nipple
46 565393 01 Hose ni le

12
2 Machine bottom part

~--27
28 - - - - - " ' " 26
34 _ _------< ~~~~- 35 1---24

: -~r~.~",~,,~,~~<~<-·~·=b~_Arr-- 45
21

• 46 12
9

29--~
TI=13
16

r
10
17
9 ---./:;;;;;;;1;;1---- 0
6---1 18 14
31 _ _---.Jii>-:: 15
32 ~~~~PI 19
11
• 44---~
5 ---=--,,----... 20

1-- f

39

38

~
o
N

13
P 615

2.1 Oil filling device


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
545831·
Ref Part No DescriDtion -80 Notes
Quantity

-
1 545817 01 Sleeve 1
. .2 s 22340627 O-ring
b-ring 11- "7&: 1-' .-
1~,1JI
2:2340627
5
1-' .i?44Q24 Qj
54239202
JIIlpple
Seal ring
,H, , ..,,1111 11""
1 - ~
n%., ,. ~,"",'i;>x" .<-'" ,~;,,,,",,

6 54581801 Round wire retaining ring 1


~ ~~~~~ I~:~~ass ~

14
2.1 Oil filling device 2 Machine bottom part

• 6
5
4
3

15
P 615

2.2 Brake
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
548046-
Ref Part No Descri tion -80 Notes
Quantity
1 54804780 Spindle
2 32652. Spring
3 548049 02 Adapter
.A N>, ~53159 02 H,qrt(jle, __ , _,"",~"H
5 222137 10 Cylindrical pin
6 22221021 Split pin
6 i her

16
2.2 Brake 2 Machine bottom part

~----4

• 7 ------7'f-

3-------+


2 -------fl:c;::

1-------+

17
P 615

3 Separator bowl
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
561137·
Ref Part No Descri tion -02 Notes
Quantity
561072 81 Bowl body complete
545869 01 Nozzle I2J 1,2 mm
"'~T'223i106 35,'0-rlhg 'T

68;Q11 :';;~: ,q-dn,g~ ~,;~ "<>'


545800 02 Rectangular ring
545655 02 Distributing ring lower
SW 54§llQ0P~j HeCtijhgul<!!i!!~g,
!i{fj~AAIl71'Q1:Y~lvilSplugjj:0'j!t "
545654 02 Operating slide
26010491 0-rin9
545800Ofj~eetl\~gul.rfing
73632 '", o-riitg
56110481 Distributing ring upper
56110483 Distributing ring upper


222111 95 CYllndrlcal piit"
,54M46 0;1, _Rec!~ng~I.(J:lng ,
544392 01 Sliding bowl bottom
15
t\?A! .. c::, 54565781 Distributor
545;ll/l3 01: Oist!)Q.utor
ll168;i1Z"Ai543S90 ot Parallel.pin ,
16 57519380 Bowl disc, caulks 0,5 mm
17 575365 80 Wing insert
la<"'-C:'j '575193 snli6Wl'disc;'ciiulks'0,5
19 ' 575193 80 BoWl disc. caulks 0,5
20 544924 01 Top disc
21 541691 02 Seal rin9
22 544391 01' BowfliOOd
,,23 223,406 ~ P-QQg;~ ~v
24 545797 02 Paring chamber cover
",35_.", 22:tt~6 1451-rin9,~
),;,l6 '.t> T'"

iil1;,l,rn '1 ('fit 56JW16'0i,!) pravitY"disc 0


..

56o,~, 6,' OI!,,~vitY,!disc 11J!50~pmm,


52'lt1m Altemati.ve
28 560916 03 Gravity disc 0 54 mm Alternative

,§gM-~~g~l~~ 9MVi~~:~6~~i ~ii:'


Alternative
)(~ematlve
31 '. 560916 06. Gr.Vi!y,~isc I1J 66 mm Alternative
32 560916 07 GravitY, disc I2J 73 mm Alternative
33 56100002 Lock rin9
w:
"'34"'" = 560916 06 Gravidisc 0 49 3 mm Altemative

18
3 Separator bowl

1---17

26,27,28,
29,30,
31,32.
34
24-~-----..I~~

1----12

• 23.----/-1-

22-"""

20--4!
1
1A
18 _ _---h
19

19
P 615

4 Inlet and outlet device


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
561313-
Ref Part No DescriDtion -01 Notes
Quantity
1 561272 81 Inlet pipe with paring disc 1
2 74067 0- rin 9 1 - _.
---
3 22341254 O-ring 1
4 561261 02 Frl!fllIl /l0Qd I_ 1 ~.~
5 54815203 Washer 2
6 22104005 Screw 2 - ~ -
--- .-
7 546157 80 Lifting eye 2
8 56130701 Height adjusting ring 3 -
9 56101302 Support ring 1
4 _
10
11
22103506
223406 29
Screw
11 - - ..... ~

--
O-ring
,_12 56129702 Coooecting/19Usin9 -- . 1 ~ I-~ ,.,;.,
13 223404 20 O-ring 1
14
15
223404 22
223404 10
O-ring
O~ring
1
1
1-
-...... -


16 559261; 01 NuC 1 1- ~

17 561271 80 Safety device 1


18
19
70560
22103506
Washer
Screw
1 ~
1 - ""'"
cl.cl. If''
,.20
21
.55276608
56259601
Washer
Nipple
•.,X;
,,' ...:;.2
22 54R152 04 Washer 2

20
4 Inlet and outlet device

+------17
,---,""

20-~ 19
ft----18

21

11 _-=~~~ "'---- 12

~r-_-_-_-_-_-:0
• 15
13
14
2

1-----1
A~"'"

• -c : =:>-
=
8

~~~~ L'I---7

~ @;l'----22

+---4

1----3

21
P 615

5 Motor mounting assembly, 50/60 Hz


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
547255-
Ref Part No Descri tion -07 -08 Notes
Quantity
50 Hz I
60 Hz I
545783 02 Motor adapter 1
544575 82 Friction coupling, 50/60 Hz See page 24
7\$el;}-'p,age Z~h*",
iL:'~~~~! ,lW~:~;~0pl~J~~:W~;Z,~,1Lw~~~ i ~L.X ,:~0j$%f&gWHM±h%dtL
5 22104056 Screw
6. ',' 2231()?,06 Spring~,asher
i:: I.545j;{~!l. 80 iil~lt tigh!~.nerJii!4iJ;
.a.;;; '\,,22104005SerewH"" n:
9 548152 03 Washer
10 26016922 Flat belt
'*;':";2601'69 '2"3 -Flat tieft~/:_».<~,'H
r'«'1'd§~
,ll':A ~'.221.045 06 Screw '
12 54815204 Washer

22
5 Motor mounting assembly, 50/60 Hz

• 7 1 11

12
=---8

.:;t.-"'--9

-1-------3

~+----4

• 10
'---6
tMl---- 5

()
;;;
'"
o

23
P 615

5.1 Friction coupling, 50/60 Hz


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
544575-
Ref Part No Descri tion -82 -83 Notes
Quantity
50 Hz I
60 Hz I
1 543858 02 Belt pulley 1
1 543858 04 Belt pulley
"W;:1'-1~1Wt2j32lf~Sa:i ;aan'heaijQg'::;~?J.gi~~'9'eRj't-"'r:'T"U~'
, 3. .".;,..-.;-S429.861W Washer:ihc, . , " -;x" ~cikE_E
4 223642 34 Snap ring
5 , " ", '. S+495.8 03._.,C:;.oupJing ~ave
f,ltt5';;';:>,~ ~'*~?4$9'15"03: :~Qupljng'in~ve .
p 6 tV,,"'Z236411Z 'Sn,ap ring)!;
7 544060 01 Friction element
8 543857 01 Cover

24
5.1 Friction coupling, 50/60 Hz 5 Motor mounting assembly, 50/60 Hz

-t----4

~~~---2

+-----3

~~~~+----2

• -+---1

• 5----+

7-~:::J; ~7
8---t- +'---8

6--~~

50 Hz 60 Hz

25
P 615

5.2 Belt tightener


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
545856·
Ref Part No Descri tion -80 -81 Notes
Quantity
50/60 Hz I
NEMA standard I
545848 01 Shaft

r rb.d:ir~:mr ~r.n:~ .
545848 02 Shaft

3 545853 02 Sleeve
4 546!:)_~? 01 Cony~yor
sJrK iNs, 2221::19;5.1
C'""

Tubular,s no in4< -l,:i-'~t}?8

26
5.2 Belt tightener 5 Motor mounting assembly, 50/60 Hz

• 3
4 5

27
P 615

6 Motor mounting assembly, NEMA standard

60 Hz NEMA standard (type 182TC "C-ftange")


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
547255-
Ref Part No Descri tion -01 Notes
Quantity
1 547251 02 Motor adapter

f'~ ··[@B~i~~:~ ~ricl;an cbuplirrg;:l:ls~stlin(faijl-t:;; .~.


:·4, >", 54313Q9'02
W!3~her '-¥4W-:>:ik~:~<\,.J®.w$.¥;r {' •.•. &1;
5 223107 06 Spring washer 1
6 22104005 Screw 1
1 .•,.~ 81 Belt ~9ti\eneft,..· P' -T
8 -:._4'L4$ Washer _ .. 4
9 22104005 Screw 4
10 26016923 Flat belt 1

28
6 Motor mounting assembly, NEMA standard

• 7
1::J---9

c$:)---- 8

-----2

+------3

=+----4

• 10
"'----5
fr'i)----6

29
P 615

6.1 Friction coupling, NEMA standard


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
544575·
Re' Part No Description -84 Notes
Quantity

_
1 54385802 Belt pulley 1
2 233211 66 Ball bearing 2
3 542986 04 Washer 1 - ~~-
.
4
5
22364234
54405804
Snap ring
Coupling hub
1
1
. - 1<__
8
~
223641 17
~~~gl
Snap ring
~~~on element
ver
2
~
- -

30
6.1 Friction coupling, NEMA standard 6 Motor mounting assembly, NEMA standard

Or-----6
1-t-----4

-}------3

~~~+_---2


+---1

• ~""'~L-5

~7
+--8

ID
N

31
P 615

7 Set of plates
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
549572-
Ref Part No Descri tion -44 Notes
3 1270320 Set of safety labels
~~i:" ,~Pgg20q19af~o/,:~~I~,V
'C IF. . . 27~9,,02 'SafelY' a I en ....
3 1270029,,03. SafelY:lapel de ..
3D" 1270020 04 Safety label fr
3E 1270020 05 Safety label es
'3F++"j2'(002Q 96. 'SalillYJaiief ru""'"
3&%!iI,1.12'700~P;Ji:i:Safe!Yl~bel
3H 1270020 08 Safety label
31 127002009 Safety label
3J,' 1:".127002010 SafelYThlbel
:i3KSi :g!:12rOo~P;!tt,SatelY'J1lbe1
3L 1270020 12 Safety label
3f;1 1122.700002q.. 13.safe.ty.I~E"I.da , _ ~ "


3N 7 20 14 Safe~h",el a r ,
".,~Qji Jk12roo~q;'t6,§.af!l!Ytl~J ntab' .=.. ii.h_
3P 1270020 16 Safety label cs
30 1270020 17 Safety label ja
'3R~$r1270020'ja 'SafelY'label ko'W_ . f·
~."' 127002919 Safetyja beJn9,_.",."._
6 553171 01 Label 50 Hz
!WI'~,!W: $iT~~5ab~;;~}Eilt.!l,f~~gs~Ciloi\.i
,,", ~'tt':~~ 55421402 I 'ti"~ ,*:~, ~

32
7 Set of plates

1 2 3,3A-S
~'W!A'~:I'N'G~
(! ~ @
.,.__ .u.:.:a............ ..... ...............

._- .......__,_.........- -_
"""Oh"""",,"""'
~-
;:..."':"-' •"""""'_111...,
~"'"'""
,
............
''''''"CI'''''''''_'
=:;:-o-~
=-....:..,,:;,,=
lW',*,",
0..''''"""""",,,,,,,.,,,,,,'
;:.-::::.t..-' ---;;-";;;...;;0..;;,.

4 5 6
50 Hz
60 Hz

• 7
e ~~~ 8

(I 0 IS iO

... ,.
.-.__ ...-=.-_...
:-

----
~---_.-
.-
2-

~:._ .

••---
~

----
-.__.
.....

_
__
..
j-.__.- =...-:.:.,..-_..-

-_
.........-_-
••'_••n"'T'"
",,_~,~

....

33
P 615

8 Gravity disc for clarification


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
560915-
Ref Part No Description -02 Notes
9uanti~
1 56091502 Gravity disc for clarification 11 I

34
8 Gravity disc for clarification

35
P 615

9 Vibration monitoring unit


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
536498-
Ref Part No Descri lion -82 Noles
Quantity
1 536469 80 Support
1A 53647001 Plate
18 5364(1p1 Cap
1Cu .c. 2211-35%11 Sqj!W/:j"
10 70915 Spring washer
1E 22171601 Screw
2" 221726'01 'ScreWW"
3 223107 35 SprinlLWlIsher
4 530307 01 Vibration switch
5 221711 13 Screw
"T-i S'=4 '{f'm>.>' 2231"Ol{S4-'S
m
tih~:was·tlerl'Jtt-

36
9 Vibration monitoring unit

1C ------------'if
• 1D ----------l~

1B-----+
1

37
P 615

10 Set of tools
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
546166-
Ref Part No Descriotion '{)9 Notes
Quantity
1 54584080 Puller and lifting tool 1 Bowl body
2
3
545841 80
54629380
Puller and lifting tool
Puller .
1
1
.. Sliding bowt bottom
Distributing ring upper
3A
3B
27345
22103560
Nut
Screw I- 33 1 - 1-- -
3C 54622201 Hose 3 I~ 1 -
4 548806 80 Compiession tool-<· 1 Disc stack
4A 54880701 Saew 1 -I- 1 -
4B 70490 Washer 1
4C
40
5
22180334
260220 03
221035 60
Nut
Lifting eye
Screw 2
1
1 1- 1-- -
--
9perating slide! Oisbibuting ring
.~

6 545844 81 Mounting and dismounting tool 1


1 -1 -
Friction coupling
-
7 54455501 Mounting tool 1 Ball bearing
I~ 1 - ~
8 54586780 Spanner for bowl hood 1 BOwl hood


8A 22104004 Screw 1 1 - 1--
9 54583702 Spanner for lock ring 1 Lock ring
10
11
1",12.. _
52735503Hexagon socket head key
521380 07
Spanners double
5?~7819 Oper:J~nt;led spanl1err
-- 1
1
1 1'" ." .¥'=-
- Nozzle

. ~ ~

13 52738008 Open-ended spanner 1


, 14 52892721 Tin hammer 1
15 52738006 dPen-fmded'spanner 1 1-' - =-
16
17
56162480
56162880
DrMDR9{ftool
Cleaning cutter
M~
1
1
B.all bearing.
Bowl spindle -
99 588071 Exoloded view

38
10 Set of tools

1 2 3

~
)
~ ~M
3B J
3e

4 5 6
@ -40
4A
4C
tll
tll (Q\)~IL:p
"'"'''' ~!" I
48
~~1'''1

• 7

c-'I(I . __________..
n . _ . ·-·rl _c
8

~ m- BA
9

I~~ I

10 11 12
i

~ 2; 0 '» )

13 14 15

• '» )

~ :2) 0
16 17

39
P 615

11 Interlocking switch
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
559889-
Ref Part No Descri tion -02 Notes
Quantity
1 559882 02 Support plate
2 551337 01 Limit switch
:'ltt:3 '»x'F'1"21121·15LSdTew" -lfF
4 223101 41 \/VasherK
5 22180320 Nut
6 221711 17 Screw

40
11 Interlocking switch


1

5 4

-l--._._._._._._._.
3

--'
'"'"
<0

41
P 615

12 Intermediate service kit


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
546669-
Ref Part No Descri tion -10 Notes
Quantity
223406 29 O-ring Support! Connecting housing
545800 01 Rectangular ring ,= Distributing ring upper "~"".,,, '= _
5458Q9}:l,~,Beptangular rt_n~'>i)#tkw:,,: i~ D)stri6uting nrig lowe{'----- ,~;;
~5~9~t9J~ :Rqqta,ng!Jli1irjingi~JMjmjh~ ,M*£Jk'_:':;~_v;m . QrM!:r;gttQR,§li~ .,...~::8:",::_::iH;:g ":««««<:::,,,,.»:,
543446 03 Rectangular ring Sliding bowl bottom! Bowl body
223404 20 O-ring Inlet pip~1 Connecting hou~,ing
223404,10 '()'iing: Ih!et;pip);TSafalydevice . "
2234064A 6-ring L:eader"bone1 Top disc"", J/
26010491 O-ring Distributing ring upper
73632 O-ring Dj~~Vi7~~_~~9 ri~g, up.p~r ;
"'0:1117 ':" 223404 8~i();nng- C~PJ)i\ iW~ 4/;;;; ,,'
s:=1~"&~ .~"" ,. 68011 3",,,; Ji'CriQ.g.,,~;,",. At:."»»:%:<:~.m~,,,,,~>,oo " ,J:lj~ltlli~ljn!tdng !Qweri,;dU:f'
13 223406 35 O-ring Distributing ring lower
14 223406 22 O-ring Bowl hoodl Paring disc chamber
't4:~¥~;. =7 7406Z1Mtd~rlng' 'p~Rifg{d'SCI $Upport' ;'\%{::'S@,?",'1F"


_16,fu ' _ 545871Q1 Y;llve,plug _ , Q~@ftbR~lide ~ ,c-,_,ceC-_'"

17 541691 02 Seal ring Bowl hood


223404 22 O-ring Inl~t p.!~1 Connecting housing
537086 Q~ MQlybdenurri~l.fil~~e past
539474,Qj!! Silicon~ gte'l~«(_&,h m :,'{<!!i(\lli{n
535586 80 Anti-friction coating
573398 Ex faded view

42
• •
11 fJ
~I~
5

~ ~9
~
(p9d
" .... " ... ,::.,'
16

o 12
13

1987A
P 615

13 Major service kit


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
546670-
Ref Part No Descri tion -07 -08 Notes
Quantity
!

1
1

44
• •
,-'''~-~

~';;~~

10
s:
~.
III
CD
S,
@
'"
;::;:

1988A
P 615

14 3-years service kit


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
555613-
Ref Part No Notes
Quantity
233211 66 Ball
545892 01 Frame
'223fQ?S5:;;priiig
7354707 Seal ring
22341238 O-ring
70915 Spring was~~r
543662 Qi Gasket X 'it:;
2.§(!244'X1l11 Screw';';' , " - ,
54581801 Round wire retaining
223406 27 O-ring
$iJ2392:i 02, Seal rin"Yf;f.r+ ; n~XMP:'pm;

46
14 3-years service kit

47
P 615

15 Tool box
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
558533-
Ref Part No Descrintion -81 Notes
9uanti~
7 558533 10 Padlock l' I

48
15 Tool box

49
16 Cross reference list

16 Cross reference list

_No. Paga Ref. ( _No. Paga Ref. '. _No. Paga Ref.
1270001 32 7 223101 41 40 4 260169 23 22 10
127002001 32 3A 223107 06 22 6 260169 23 28 10
127002002 32 36 223107 06 28 5 26016923 44 10
127002003 32 3C 22310734 36 6 26022003 38 4D
127002004 32 3D 22310735 36 3 260244 01 46 8
- 127002005 32 3E 22310735 46 3
1-
260244 01 12 35
1270020 06 32 3F 22310735 12 3 27345 38 3A
127002007 32 3G 22340316 12 15 32652 16 2
127002008 32 3H 223403 16 44 1 37535 12 12
1270020 09 32 31 223404 10 20 15 37535 44 7
.~ 1-
1270020 10 32 3J 223404 10 42 7 41456 28 8
1270020 11 32 3K 223404 20 20 13 52633706 12 44
1270020 12 32 3L 223404 20 42 6 526378 19 38 12

-
1270020 13
1270020 14
1270020 15
1270020 16
1270020 17
1270020 18
c'·
32
32
32
32
32
32
3M
3N
30
3P
)IQ
3R
223404 22
223404 22
223404 82
22340482
22340614
223406 14
20
42
42
12
42
18
14
18
11
36
Q~
251 llill
527355 03
52738006
52738007
52738008
52892701
530307 01
38
38
38
38
38
36
10
15
11
13
14
4

~,
1270020 19 32 3S 22340622 42 '14 53558660 42 21
1270320 32 3 223406 22 18 23 53646980 36 1
221035 02 12 25 223406 27 46 10 536470 01 36 1A
221035 06 20 10 223406 27 14 2 536471 01 36 16
221035 06 20 19 223406 27 14 3 53708603 42 19

-' 22103560
22103560
38
38
36
5
22340629
22340629
20
42
1~
1
. 53947403
541691 02
42
42
20
17
22104004 38 BA 22340629 44 2 541691 02 18 21
22104005 20 6 22340629 12 27 54239202 46 11
221040 05 22 8 22340635 42 13 54239202 14 5
22104005 28 6 22340635 18 2 54298604 24 3
22104005 28 9 22341238 46 5 54298604 30 3
22104005 12 32 22341238 12 5 543446 03 42 5
221040 05 12 43 22341249 44 3 54344603 18 13


221040 05 12 8 22341249 12 29 543590 07 18 156

-- 22104041
22104056
22104506
12
22
22
39
5
11
22341254
22341254
20
44
3
5
54360902
54361201
54381201
12
12
44
19
23
22361007 12 14 8
221045 29 12 4 22364117 24 6 54361302 12 24
221121 15 40 3 223641 17 30 6 54361980 44 4

-- 221135 11
221711 13
38
36
1C
5
22364234
22364234
24
30
4
4
54381980
54364501
12
12
9
34
221711 17 40 6 22364236 12 20 54366202 46 7
221716 01 36 1E 226314 11 26 2 54366202 12 33
221726 01 36 2 233211 66 24 2 54366902 22 4

.-- 221803 20
22180334
40
38 4C
5 233211 66
233211 66
30
46
2
1
54366902
54385701
28
24
4
8
222111 95 18 12A 260104 91 42 9 54385701 30 8
222119 51 26 5 280104 91 18 9 54365802 24 1
222137 10 16 5 26016922 22 10 54385802 30 1
222210 21 16 6 26016922 44 10
iiil 54385804 24 11

50
P 615

~No. hrtNo. 'M PllltNo. ,...,. !fef,

54395305 12 45 545871 01 42 16 561000 02 18 33


544024 01 14 4 545871 01 18 7 561013 02 20 9
54405803 24 5 545892 01 12 2 561072 81 18 1
544058 04 30 5 545892 01 46 2 561104 81 18 12
544060 01 24 7 54605702 12 37 561104 83 18 12
54406001 30 7 54615780 20 7 561261 02 20 4
544060 01 44 9 54622201 38 3C 581271 80 20 17
54420302 12 22 54629380 38 3 561272 81 20 1
54433702 12 26 54656201 26 4 56129702 20 12
544391 01 18 22 54691503 24 5 56130701 20 8
54439201 18 14 547251 02 28 1 56162480 38 16
54446502 44 11 547260 01 28 2 56162880 38 17
54455501 38 7 54801003 12 1 562596 01 20 21
54457582 22 3 548012 02 12 6 56539301 12 46
54457583 22 3 54804680 12 41 56627901 12 30


54457584 28 3 54804780 16 1 56761601 16 7
54492401 18 20 54804902 16 3 573398 42 99
54559701 12 17 548051 05 12 11 573400 44 99
545601 80 12 13 548051 05 44 6 57519380 18 16
54562002 12 21 54815203 20 5 57519380 18 18
545654 02 18 8 548152 03 22 9 57519380 18 19
54565502 18 5 548152 03 12 31 57536580 18 17
545657 81 18 15 548152 03 12 42 588071 38 99
545683 01 18 15A 548152 03 12 7 68011 42 12
54578302 22 1 548152 04 20 22 68011 18 3
54579702 18 24 54815204 22~"'~ 12 70490 38 ";YiF'4B
54580001 42 2 54880680 38 4 70560 20 18
54580001 18 10 548807 01 38 4A 70915 38 10
54580002 42... .." ... 3 551337 01 40 2 70915 46 6
54580002 18 4 55276608 20 20 73547 46 4
54580003 42 4 55315902 16 4 73547 12 28
54580003 18 6 553171 01 32 6 73632 42 10
545817 01 14 1 553272 01 32 6 73632 18 11
54581801 46 9 55421402 32 8 74067 20 2
54581801 14 6 558533 10 48 7 74067 42 15
54581901 7


14 55926601 20 16
545831 80 12 40 55999202 40 1
54583201 14 8 560757 01 12 10
54583702 38 9 56076301 12 16
54584080 38 1 56076780 12 18
545841 80 38 2 56091502 34 1
545844 81 38 6 56091601 18 26
54584801 26 1 56091602 18 27
54584802 26 1 56091603 18 28
545853 01 26
rr.-----
3 56091604 18 29
54585302 26 3 56091605 18 30
54585680 22 7 56091606 18 31
54585681 28 7 56091607 18 32
54586780 38 8 56091608 18 34
54586901 18 lA 56098580 12 38

51
PA 615
Spare Parts Catalogue

SpecificaUon No. 576845-01/2


Book No. 577185-02 Rev. 4

Spare parts catalogue Catalogo parti di ricambio


Reservdelskatalog Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes
Ersatzteilkatalog Varaosaluettelo
Catalogue de pieces de KU'tUAoyocr UV'tuAAaK'ttKffiV
rechange
Catalogue de piezas de Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
recambio
KaTaJIOr 3anaCHbIX Reservedelskatalog
qaCTeH

Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden

Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46853031040

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2008-11-25


This publication or any part there of may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 6
1.2 Translation list 9

2 Valve block 12

3 Oil ancillary kit 14


3.1 Temperature sensor 16

• 3.2 3-way valve complete


3.3 Pressure transmitter complete
3.4 Regulating valve
18
22
24

4 Sludge outlet 28

5 Sludge removal kit 30

6 Butterfly valve kit 32

7 Starter 34

• 8

9
ESO-relay kit

Spare parts, operating liquid pipe


36

38

10 Spare parts, oil ancillary 40

11 Spare parts, control unit 42

12 Spare parts, butterfly valve 44

13 Slugde pump T70 spare par 46

14 Cross reference list 48

3
1 Read this first

1 Read this first

- --
-

• -
Check the machine unit number on the name-plate before using this catalogue
8
Kontrollera maskinenhetens nummer pa maskinskylten innan du anvander katalogen
B
Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer
G
o La plaque de la machine, un guide pour trouver le numero de piece de rechange correct

La placa-marca de la maquina - guia del numero correcto del repuesto


G
• G
CD
<pl'lpMeHHaH Ta6IlI'IYKa MaWI'IHbl - yKaaaTeIlb npaSI'IIlHOrO HOMepa aanacHoi1 yaCTI'I

La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi

o La placa do fabricante da maquina - um guia do numero correto das partes sobressalentes

Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon


CD
o H TT1vaKil5a Tile; IJllxaV~e; EivCl 0 ol5lly6e; TOU OWOTOU avmMaKTIKou

o Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer

~
Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer

5
PA 615

1.1 General information

Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine


Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of a separator equipped with non-original spare parts.
We guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.

8
Folj dill kvalitetstankande genom all endast anvanda Alfa Laval
originalreservdelar.
Kom ihag all Alfa Laval inte tar nagot ansvar for fel pa en
separator, som innehaller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar


kvaliteten och driftsakerheten endast has vara egna produkter.

G
Aus ROcksicht auf Ihr Bestreben urn beste Qualitat sollten Sie
nur Alfa Laval Originalersatzteile benutzen.
Vergessen Sie nicht, Alfa Laval kann keine Verantwortung fOr
das Versagen eines Separators Obernehmen, der nicht mit
Originalersatzteilen versehen is!. Wir garantieren Qualitat und
Zuverlassigkeit unserer Produkte.

[8
Preservez la qualite de vas equipments en n'employant que des
pieces de rechange Alfa Laval.
N'oubliez pas q'Alfa Laval decline toute responsabilite en cas
de panne d'un separateur non equipe de pieces de rechange
d'origine. Nous garantissons la qualite et la fiabilite de nos
produits.

G
Mantenga su compromiso con la calidad, al usar siempre piezas
de repuesto Alfa Laval autenticas.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta responsabilidad par el
fallo de una separadora equipada con piezas de repuesto no

originales. Garantizamos la calidad y fiabilidad de nuestros
productos.

6
1.1 General information 1 Read this first

rapaHHlpyliiTe HaAelKHOCTb Ka'leCTBa BCerAa I1CnOllb3Yfl


n0AnI1HHble 3anaCHble 'laCTI1 cPl1PMbl Alfa Lava!.
3anOMHI1Te, 'lTO Alfa Laval He HeceT OTBeTCTBeHHOCTI1 3a
nOBpe>K,QeHl1e cenapaTopa, oCHaLlleHHoro HenOA/lI1HHbIMI1
3an'laCTaMI1. Mbl rapaHTl1pyeM Ka'leCTbO 11 HaAelKHOCTb HaWI1X
l13Aelll1lii.

Salvaguardate la vostra garanzia di qualita facendo sempre uso


di parti di ricambio Alfa Laval autentiche.
Tenete presente che la Alfa Laval non puo accettare
responsabilita per avaria ad un separatore attrezzato con parti


di ricambio non originali. Noi garantiamo la qualita I'affidabilita
dei nostri prodotti.

o
Proteja 0 seu cometimento a qualidade usando sempre pe~s
sobressalentes genuinas Alfa Lava!.
Nao esquec;;a que Alfa Laval nao aceita responsabilidade por
falha de uma separadora equipada com pe~s sobressalentes
nao genuinas. Nos garantimos a qualidade e a confian~ dos
nossos produtos.

o
Varmistakaa vastuunne laadusta kaytlamalla aina alkuperaisia
Alfa Laval varaosia.
Muistakaa, Alfa Laval ei voi hyvaksya vastuuta ei-alkuperasilla
varaosilla varustetun separaattorin vaurioista. Me takaamme
tuotteidemme laadun ja kaytlovarmuuden.

o
• E~aaq)QAioTE UllHIM TTOIOH]Ta XPflar!.JOTTOIUlVTae;; !.Jovo vvr'jara
aVTaMaKTIKa HIe;; Alfa Lava!.
'EXETE UTTOljJllv OTI fl Alfa Laval OEV avaAa!.Jl3avEI Ka!.J!.Jla EU8uVfl
Via I3MI3Ee;; 130uTUpo!.Jflxavr'jc;, OTllv oTToia EXOUV EljlOP!.JOOTEi !.Jr'j
vvr'jaro OVTaMOKTIKa. Eyyuo!.JaOTE TTOIOTIlTa KOI KoM AElTouPVio
!.Jovo Via Ta olKa !.Joc; TTporOVTa.

7
PA 615

Streef naar een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik


uitsluitend originele Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen. Streef naar
een zo hoog mogelijke kwaliteit en gebruik uitsluitend originele
Alfa Laval reserveonderdelen.
Vergeet niet dat Alfa Laval niet verantwoordelijk is voor een
defecte separator die niet-originele onderdelen bevat. Wij
garanderen de kwaliteit en betrouwbaarheid van onze eigen
produkten.

~
Hold Dem til den kvalitet, De har valgt at satse pa, ved altid at
anvende regte Alfa Laval reservedele.
Husk, at Alfa Laval ikke kan patage sig noget ansvar for fejl


pa en separator, som indeholder uoriginale dele. Vi kan kun
garantere kvalitet og driftsikkerhed pa vore egne produkter.

8
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first

1.2 Translation list

Oversattningslista
Obersetzungsliste
liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones

8 8
Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr.
(B
Numero de piece Pieza No.

Antal Anzahl Quantitl:l Cantidad


Benamning Bezeichnung Denomination Oescripci6n

Anmarkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notes

Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de maquina

Produktnr Produktnummer Numero de produit Numero de producto

Maskinblocksbenamning Bezeichnung des Denomination de partie Descripci6n de secci6n de


Maschinenblocks de machine la maquina

Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nO No. de seccion de


maquina

Denomination de Oescripci6n de
sous-ensemble 5ubconjunto

N° de sous-ensemble Numero de 5ubconjunto

Voir page Vease la pagina

ReI. de fig. Referencia de figura

Nom du produit Nombre del producto

$~' Utbyte nOdv:indiggOr Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el


ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der necessite le reequilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trammel du 001
Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste separee des Vease la lista de piezas
Ersatzteilliste pieces de rechange separada

Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non fivre comme piece de No se entrega como pieza
reservdel geliefert rechange de recambio

9
PA 615

CnOBapb nepeBAa
Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradu~ao
Kaannosluttelo

0 0 0
Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero

Kon-eo Quantita Quantidade Lukumaara

HaHMeHOB8Hllle Descrizione Descricao Nimitys

Note Notas Huomautuksia

MaWlltH8 THna

Apn1KYIl N2

HSIIIMeHoeaHllle 6noKa
Tipo macchina

Nr.prodotto

Descrizione unita
T1po de maquina

No. do produto

Descricao da unidade da
Konetyyppi

Tuotteen no

Koneenosan nimitys

MaWIIIHbI macchina maquina

cnOK M8WIIIHbI N2 Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no


maquina

HalllMeHoeaHllle rpynnbl Descr1zione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhma.n nimitys

rpynna N2 Nr. sottogruppo Numero de subconjunto Alaryhman no

CM. crpaHIIIL4Y Vedi pagina Vease la pagina Ks sivu

CCblIlK8 Ha 3CK\o13 Rif. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviite

HaIo1MeHOBaHIo1e apwlI<yna Nome prodotto

3aMeHa Tpe6yeT
6anaHCLIJpOBKLIJ fiapafiaHa
La sostituzione comporta
la equilibratura del
tamburo
Nombre del producto

El racmblo requiere el
reequilibrado del rotor
Tuotteen nimi

Vaihdettaessa kuula
tasapainoitettava
uudelleen

CM. oT,QenbHbI~ nepeYeHb Vedi lista separata delle Vease la lista de piezas Katso erillista
3anaCHblX 4aCTe~ parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa

He nOCTaBIleHa BMeCTe c Non fomito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
JanaCHblMLIJ 4aCTRMLIJ ricambio de recambio

10
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first

rI\oIIAPI
Vertaallijst
Oversa!ttelseliste

~ GO 0 ~
Pari 110. ApI8~6<; avraMOKTIKOU Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer

I:uvoAo Hoeveelheid Antal

nEPlYpaq>~ Beschrijving Betegnelse

napar~p~aE"; Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger

• TUTTa~ ~~xav~~OTa~

ApI8~6~ 1Tpoi6vro~

nEplvpaq)/'1 aUVKpoT~l.laTO<;
Machinetype

Produktnr.

Machineblokbenaming
Maskintype

Produktnr.

Maskinbetegnelse
~~xav~~

Ap19jJ6C; crUyKpoTl'1lJaTOC; Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.


~~xav~~

nEp1vpaqlr'! UTTOcrUYKpoTr'\l.laTO <; Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse

tlO. ApI8~6~ UTTaauV1'POT~~OTO~ Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.

seepage BAtTlE aUJoo Zie blz. Se side

naparro~" Ot ElK6va Afb. ref. Figurtlenvisning

• "Jbllla"cillll of bawl
Ovol.loafa TTpoi6VT~

AvraMayJj OTTOlTtl
rnavapp091JlOfllooppoTTlac;
TOU nj".movou
Produktnaam

Vervangning vereist
herbalanceren van de kogel
Produktnavn

Udskriftning kraever
afbalcering af kuglen

sapanl\e spa", parIS list BArnE EI6IK~ .Moro Vervangning vereist van de Se spaat reservedelsliste
<IV'1l1MOKTIKWV kegel

86Sp8r& lllv rrapa15i6ETol wC; Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke $Om reservedel
avraMOKTlK6 reserveonderdeel

11
PA 615

2 Valve block
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
570807-
Re' Part No Descriotion ~1 Notes
Quantity
1 176592702 Valve block, water 1
2 176603708 Flow valve 1
3 176603705 Flow valve 1
4
5
176603704 Flow valve
55122813 Connecting for sOlenoid valve
5355065301 Flexible hose-water
1
3
1
~
- ~

6
1
~ - -
~ 535506~~1 I ~~~~:; connection 1

12
2 Valve block

CP (D CjJ
I ! /
II I /
I
I
,

I I /1
------_.-----_----0
• .Mllf-Yl'::.....t-J'-. I I/
I I
----

--

13
PA 615

3 Oil ancillary kit


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
574090-
Ref Part No Descri tion -84 -85 -86 -87 Notes
Quantity
GO/MDO, IF30 -IF180, DIN
GO/MDO, IF30 - IF180, JIS "
HFO/LO, DIN
HFO/LO, JIS
" "
1
2
176443980
573699 80
Temperature sensor
3-way valve complete
" 1

2 573699'81. 3-way yalveGgmplete


3 176092,6 oj Nipple0 "~ "
3 573690 80 Connection flange JIS
4 573695 80 Flexible hose
-5'7 '$4$2Z9' 35' 'Reeta'ilgula( ririSJii
6, 2",57484gjlQ: P"'AAure,!ran~Q1~,lerconnpl'l(~
7' 576792 01 Nipple

~~~~~R5 ~~~~ehose
7
'8"


"'
,'
9.~'., 546229 35 RegtaI'l9ul:aJ. r:if19 *',,_
10 57484960 Pressure transmitter complete
11 1760926 01 Nipple
12,' 17~2570 80 Regulating valve

12 176257084 Regulating valve


~,; ,<, . ._,_ ,,' Jk. ~:':':);!!;W$;:%
576792 02 Nipple
546229 14 Rectan ular rin

14
3 Oil ancillary kit

• 1 2 i-------------.------l
:

: -nI ~
3

LQIN._ ve:rsie>'2.. .
11:

.J
i
5
-1-
9
-l -1-
7

_4'
,--------------------,

!_~3
I
i
,
U.IS .ye.rsi<?_'!.- j

6 10 12

• ~
13; 14 8

CD
<0
o
N

15
PA 615

3.1 Temperature sensor


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
1764439-
Ref Part No Description -80 Notes
01
02
1764391 01 Temperature sensor
176181480 Spnno pocket ~I rntr
I

16
3.1 Temperature sensor 3 Oil ancillary kit


CD

17
PA 615

3.2 3-way valve complete


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
573699-
Ref Part No Descriotion -80 -81 Notes
Quantity
DIN I
JIS I
2 57440980 3-way solenoid valve 1 1 See page 20
3 17634~1 03 Nipple 1 1
;::w 1;);
Ixl4 4
' 176183 05 Washer fm:WllW It :2 2 CuWasher fWd- ••• ;d

18
3.2 3-way valve complete 3 Oil ancillary kit

AIR SUPPLY
.
'.'

• 10


TO SEPARATOR
.. -
..
INLET

RECIRCULATION

ID
N

'"
N

19
PA 615

3.2.1 3-way solenoid valve


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
574409-
Ref Part No Descri tion -80 -81 Notes
Quantity
1 57440901 3-way electric valve
1 574409 04 3-way solenoid valve 1
2 574409 02 Coil 1
2 574409 05 eo« 1
3 56971201 Rectangular connector
3 56971203 Rectangular connector 1
441301 Silencer Nr MS 1 1

20
3.2 3-way valve complete 3 Oil ancillary kit

21
PA 615

3.3 Pressure transmitter complete


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
574849-
Ref Part No Descri tion -80 Notes
Quantity
1 574840 02 Pressure transmitter with contact
2 1763903 03 Needle valve
3 5355171602, Wastier
4 . 17650?? O@;N.iPl!I~.
5 176183406 Washer

22
3.3 Pressure transmitter complete 3 Oil ancillary kit

u..
'"
N
N

23
PA 615

3.4 Regulating valve


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
1762570-
Ref Part No Descrintion -80 -84 Notes
Quantity
DIN I
JIS I
02 1761731 80 Insert 1 1 DN25
See page 26
Z 176199580 RP.Oulatinn valve snare narts

24
3.4 Regulating valve 3 Oil ancillary kit


(lE NO,

25
PA 615

3.4.1 Insert
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
1761731-
Ref Part No DescriDtion -80 Notes
Quantity
1 176188080 Spindle 1
2 176189501 Gasket 1 -~ .,
3,1 176189401 Stuffing box nut 1
32 176148213 0·ri °9 1
3.3 176188701 Gasket 3
1- - -
3,4
3.5
176188801
176199601
Sleeve
Washer
1
1
I-- i - ~ .-- .-
3,6
4
176189001
176188501
Spring
Dome-shaped part
1
1
...- 1--
- _.
5
6
176188601
1761891 80
Lock nut
Locking device I- 1 1--- i-- ~

7.
8
9
53500185 01
~?~gt3201
Wheel
Washer
35 23901 Nul
1
1
1
~
., -

26
3.4 Regulating valve 3 Oil ancillary kit

9
8
7

• 6
3.2
3.1
3.3
3.4
3.6
3.5
4

• 5
2
1

ID
'"o
N

27
PA 615

4 Sludge outlet
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
53550763-
Ref Part No DescriDtion ~1 ~2 Notes
Quantity
DIN !
JIS !
1 5355085380 Inspection pipe DIN 1

2
1 5355085381 Inspection pipe JIS
1765934 02 Flexible connection 2
1
2 - -
4
5
1762017 01 Hose
176202003 Hose dip
1
2
1
2 - >-

12 176609601 PluQ 1 1

28
4 Sludge outlet

• 2

...J
~
N

29
PA 615

5 Sludge removal kit


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
568473-
Ref Part No Descri tion -84 -85 Notes
Quantity
DIN I
JIS I

-
568161 80 Sludge tank 1
1766699 01 Sludge pump
1'(66104 01 Level switch ---%'~---' '<
J.r6~OJ70t H.ose ,
5355074601 Flexible hose
i' ~~%r T})3~6~i}·g~ :~~~~lg;: ~6~:-I,.G;~~.9>W.K~il'£'f$1\:- <Ilw~H",,,k
·.&,·9d~~:-:1f_:1:zggtr69 . 8.0. 'C_O'let<:::::,::~~ Gl:W<fA:~:::L %&:"n:~H~2~;)f).,
10 176678801 Gaskel
11 176378002 Nipple
12'1J.176l\8Mi01: Piu "ffi
13 &,; &It!l311l0,'Qa Nipg,e
14 1765962 80 Flange


14 176596281 Flange
1$@' 11116nS'02 Inlel pipe
16 223101 47 Washer
17 221035 07 Screw
18 ,526352 01 Bushing
23- ;' ',1166dd'2~01: Non.retumvalve",·,':i&;,jif '91!W1f"
"" ..~5"d~ %",;.~L.44Q~ 8;t ,~::V'~Y soIElnoj~_.~~.~,1t~trh:im~,*,~
27 176597401 Elbow pipe
28 1763911 03 Flexible connection
ii, 29;11 k'1'7§!1O&1 01. Regu!ating val~2
j!i.3.1;i",,*,il7Ali~!i03H,o~:clip 4.:':'
32 176148206 O-ring
34 176621802 Elbow
",,;,,;X51438Erei1' EXtehtion Pipe'
'=:3'5'=~'
3 1.7<176183411 Cu was e

30
5 Sludge removal kit

.' 29

Sludge from separator Sludge from separator


Sludge out

] (]
• 12
~
,J.

.j to be sealed with locking liquid

31
PA 615

6 Butterfly valve kit


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
568399-
Ref Part No Description -01 Notes
1
2
176600701 Butterfly valve
568304 03 SIudae valve inter10ck ~I
,uanr I Mounted in Control unit

••

32
6 Butterfl y valve kit

33
~~~---

PA 615

7 Starter
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
571306·
Ref Part No Descri tion ·80 Notes
57130601 Basic kit for starter

'Mill. ~~~~H~~lj~i~~~a~~~ .-
(§t1;3jL6.,j:K l?iip~r.6::}-10A
57130613 Sep.Starter. 10-1SA
571306 20 Pump starter. 0.4-0.S3A
-5113lJ6-~l pump."",rter, O.63-1A
_57130.6'?2. pul1lll'lil!!r\er. 1-1.6A
57130S 23 Pump starter. 1.6-2.5A
57130S24 Pump starter. 2.5-4A
511306J$B~"!.p ~(ler•.4-6.3'A
571306r26 Eum .sterter 6.3-10A·

34
7 Starter

• [ 1 I] ~
61

62
o

<;> , - . , r-...,

GBBEf
L_..JL_...J

[Q]~ B 01I 02 03 OB []~!lIDJ


""XT TBG
1<;21 FB
L::J
D I ml
i--l
as-
6
X40X~1

• I 01
Xl

[Q] L__ J X2 ~
<;>

w
<'t
N

35
PA 615

8 ESO-relay kit

Mounted in starter
Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
571306-
Ref Part No Description -53 Notes
Qluantr
112K
112.1K
5350002809 Relay
5350002808 Relay socket ~I I

36
8 ESD-relay kit

• X1

GEEEr01 02 03 08~' 18

11

EIE]lITl X1
~

• !
X2
!
...L..
- J

37
PA 615

9 Spare parts, operating liquid pipe

Not included elewhere


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
1765993-
Ref Part No Descri tion -83 Notes
Quantity
1765993 01 Retaining clip
1765993 02 Spring
176599303 Core" I,
1?ll5\l9304 sRrlhg'washer
1765993 05 O-ring
1765993 06 Piston
fi:!l$993 01DI~~01f~j!:: Ni
=,41659_93"06 fl[on,returQ valve..:'
1765993 09 O-ring
1765993 lOO-ring
1711lj993 11 con, v
24 . =


iXlll6QQ4 07, .\'YaiIDeJ adhesive tape
1766004 08 Indicator
1?~~993_,~ 3 DW~~{~IVe

38
9 Spare parts, operating liquid pipe

• --11
i
0-
+,u
~l~ 1

o
<l;
o
N

39
PA 615

10 Spare parts, oil ancillary


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
1764734-
Ref Part No DescriDtion -82 Notes

tvg!, J"a"T ~gJt-


01 176473404 Diaphragm
02 1764734 05 Stuffing box kit
'?ij~j~ _. 1'164134 06 Stein/disc ·kif'*~~= W;'~'*\\_'·

40
10 Spare parts, oil ancillary

/'-~
I
~!
,I I.
___1- __


,
\
U! -~t

41
PA 615

11 Spare parts, control unit


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
568452-
Ref Part No DescriDtion -02 Notes
Quantity
1 318306245 1 EPC 50 OP Front Module 1
2
3
4
3183068651
31830 63461
31830 6241 1
EPC 50 1/0 Board P-prog
Cable
EPC 50 Transfonner
1
1
1 - ~
-- ,,-
i~" i - 1- -~
9 5350046201 Push button 1
10 53500201 03 Switch 1 --- ,-~ i-
II 53500201 10 Sealing 1
12
15
5350020111
53500201 30
LED bulb, wI1i!f>. 24VAC
Selector switch
1
1 - ,- I -
16
18
53500201 31
5350045102
Legend plate
P~otlamp
1
1 - ....... ,-
,

21
22
31830 63731
318306372 1
Fuse kiL
EPC 50 Board Mounting Kit
_.- _1
1 ,-'
23 5350046203 Protection 1

42
11 Spare parts, control unit

43
PA 615

12 Spare parts, butterfly valve


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
1766161-
Ref Part No DescriDtion -80 Notes
1
2
176616101 Seat
176616105 Limit switch 11
iuantr I

44
12 Spare parts, butterfly valve

45
PA 615

13 Slugde pump T70 spare par


Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
1766702-
Re' Part No Descriotion -80 Notes
Quantity
1 176670201 D-ringlpacking k~ 4
2 176670202 Diaphragm 2
3
4 .
5
176670203
176670204
176670205
O-ring
Air valve complete
Muffler
6
1
1
_.-- -I-

.-

46
13 Slugde pump T70 spare par


,
,, " ".,-1, /
,, ,, ,, -(-,
,, ,
' ....-..-i-"'"::: 2
0 I
i
0
i
i
i
._._._. I
0 -.-+_.
!
I
~ J

0 cb 0 I
/ .... ;-'
4

'\
I I


-r-

Z
M
N
~
N

47
14 Cross reference list

14 Cross reference list

Part No. ~ ~.;£ hit ..... "- Ref. Paltflo. P., Ref.
1760926 01 14 3 176599309 38 9
5355065301 12 6
1760926 01 14 11 1765993 10 38 10
53550654 01 12 7
1761482 06 30 32 1765993 11 38 11
5355065501 12 8
1761482 13 26 3.2 1765993 13 38 14
5355074601 30 6
1761731 80 24 02 1765993 16 38 15
5355074701 30 8
176181480 16 02 176600201 30 23
53550853 80 28 1
1761834 05 18 4 1766004 07 38 12
5355085381 28 1
1761834 06 22 5 1766004 08 38 13
5355171602 22 3
1781834 11 30 36 176600701 32 1
54622914 14 14
176188080 26 1 176603704 12 4
54622935 14 5
1761885 01 26 4 176603705 12 3
54622935 14 9
176188601 26 5 1766037 08 12 2
55122813 12 5

••
1761887 01 26 3.3 1766081 01 30 29
568161 80 30 1
176188801 26 3.4 176609601 28 12
568304 03 32 2
176189001 26 3.6 1766161 01 44 1
569712 01 20 3
17151891 80 26 6 -1766161 05 44 '2 56971203 20 3
1761894 01 26 3.1 176621802 30 34
571306 01 34 60
176189501 26 2 176669901 30
46-- 57130610 34 61
176199580 24 Z 176670201
571306 11 34 61
1761996 01 26 - 3.5. i!76670202 46
57130612 34 61
1762017 01 28 4 1766702 03 46 3
571306 13 34 61
1762017 01 30 5 1766702 04 46 4
57130620 34 62
1762020 03 28 5 1766702 05 46 5
57130621 34 62
176202003 30 31 1766704 01 30 3
57130622 34 62
1762570 80 14 12 176671502 30 15
57130623 34 62
176257084 14 12 176678801 30 -10·
57130624 34 62
1763491 03 18 3 176678980 30 9
57130625 34 62
1763780 02 30 11 178889301 30 12
57130626 34 62
1763780 03 30 13 22103507 30 17
57369080 14 3
1763903 03 22 2 223101 47 30 16
57369580 14 4
1763911 03 30 28 318306241 1 42 4
57369580 14 8
1764391 01 16 01 3183062451 42 1
57369980 14 2
176443980 14 1 3183063461 42 3


573699 81 14 2
1764734 04 40 01 318306372 1 42 22
574351 02 30 7
1764734 05 40 02 3183063731 42 21
57438601 30 35
1764734 06 40 03 3183068651 42 2
57440901 20 1
1765082 09 22 4 52635201 30 18
57440902 20 2
176592702 12 1 5350002808 36 112.1K
57440904 20 1
1765934 02 28 2 5350002809 36 112K
574409 05 20 2
176596280 30 14 5350018501 26 7
57440980 18 2
1765962 81 30 14 53500201 03 42 10
57440981 30 24
1765974 01 30 27 53500201 10 42 11
57441301 20 4
1765993 01 38 1 53500201 11 42 12
57484002 22 1
176599302 38 2 53500201 30 42 15
57484980 14 6
1765993 03 38 3 53500201 31 42 16
57484980 14 10
176599304 36 4 5350023901 26 9
57679201 14 7
176599305 38 -~~
..;,
5 5350043201 26 8
57679202 14 13
176599306 38 "" 6 53500451 02 42 18
57679203 14 7
176599307 38 7 5350046201 42 9
176599308 38 8 5350046203 42 23

48

You might also like